NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon

Let us Recite!

Take a bus
Or take a train,
Take a boat
Or take a plane,

Take a taxi,
Take a car,
Maybe near
Or maybe far,

Take a rocket
To the moon,
But be sure
To come back soon.

Come Back Soon NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 5 Summary and Solutions

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon Let Us Recite

Let us Do!

Question 1. Tick (✓) the correct option.

1. The Poem describes the various modes of __________

  1. Transport
  2. Study
  3. Roads
  4. Toys

Answer: 1. Transport

2. One can take a bus or __________

  1. Metro
  2. Tram
  3. Rickshaw
  4. Train

Answer: 4. Train

Class 2 NCERT English Chapter 5: Come Back Soon Key Concepts

3. A _____ can take you to the moon.

  1. Plane
  2. Helicopter
  3. Rocket
  4. Boat

Answer: 3. Rocket

Question 2. State ‘T’ for True and ‘F’ for False statements.

1. You can take a boat or a plane.
Answer: True

2. One can go near but not far.
Answer: False

3. A taxi can travel on water.
Answer: False

4. One should not come back soon.
Answer: False

5. A plane is the same as a rocket.
Answer: False

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Chapter 5: Come Back Soon

Question 3. Complete the following lines of the poem with the suitable words given in the brackets.

1. Take a boat or take a __________. (plain, plane)
Answer: Plane

2. May be near ______ maybe far. (nor, or)
Answer: or

3. But ________ sure to come back soon. (be, bee)
Answer: be

Question 4. Match the pictures in Column A with what they are in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon Match The Vechicle Picture In Column A With Column B

Come Back Soon: NCERT Class 2 English Solutions

Answer: 1-D, 2-C, 3-E, 4-B, 5-A

Question 5. Choose the correct opposite word from the box given below. (Near, Unsure, Later, Go)

  1. Come
  2. Far
  3. Sure
  4. Soon

Answer:

  1. Go
  2. Near
  3. Unsure
  4. Later

Come Back Soon NCERT Solutions Class 2 English Chapter 5

Question 6. Write the plural of the following words.

  1. Bus
  2. Plane
  3. Rocket
  4. Taxi
  5. Train
  6. Car

Answer:

  1. Buses
  2. Planes
  3. Rockets
  4. Taxis
  5. Trains
  6. Cars

Question 7. The following words have been taken from the poem and are jumbled. Rearrange them properly.

  1. IXTA
  2. ITRNA
  3. TRCOKE
  4. OATB

Answer:

  1. TAXI
  2. TRAIN
  3. ROCKET
  4. BOAT

Question 8. A few means of transport are given in the box.

NCERT Class 2 Chapter 5: Come Back Soon Explanation

Can you separate them according to the surface they move on and write them under the respective clouds?

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon Separate According To The Surface They Move On

Answer:

Land: Metro, Jeep, Cycle, Truck, Train

Air: Helicopter, Rocket, Aeroplane

Water: Ship, Raft, Yacht, Canoe

Let us Write!

Question 9. Write ‘A’ or ‘An’ before the following words.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon Add A Or An Before Words

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 5: Come Back Soon Questions and Answers

Answer:

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 5 Come Back Soon Adding A Or An Before Words

 

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing

Let us Do!

Question 1. Tick (✓) the correct option.

1. Onshangla returned from the _________

  1. Hospital
  2. School
  3. Store
  4. Garden

Answer: 2. School

2. A new _____ came to her class

  1. Boy
  2. Girl
  3. Teacher
  4. Principal

Answer: 1. Boy

Seeing Without Seeing NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 4 Summary and Solutions

3. Ava is Onshangla’s _______

  1. Sister
  2. Mother
  3. Aunt
  4. Nanny

Answer: 2. Mother

Question 2. State ‘T’ for True and ‘F’ for False statements.

1. Nothing happened in the school.
Answer: False

2. The new boy wore black glasses.
Answer: True

3. Her mother played a game with Onshangla.
Answer: True

4. Ava held a large bell in her hand.
Answer: False

5. Ava removed the scarf.
Answer: True

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 4: Seeing Without Seeing

Question 3. Read the lines of the story and answer the questions.

She opened the door quietly. She kept her bag on the table quietly. Her mother looked at her.

1. Who is ‘She’ in the given lines?
Answer: Onshangla

2. Where has ‘She’ come from?
Answer: She has come from school

3. The opposite of ‘ opened’ is ________
Answer: Closed

Question 4. On the basis of the story, give answers to the following questions.

1. Who joined the class that day? (Ava/A blind boy)
Answer: A blind boy joined the class that day.

2. How was the rose? (Hard/Soft)
Answer: The rose was soft.

3. What was in the glass? (Water/Orange juice)
Answer: Orange juice was in the glass.

4. Who called Onshangla ‘smart? (Ava/The new boy)
Answer: Ava called Onshangla smart.

Question 5. Tick (✓) the correct spelling from the options given below.

1.

  1. Quietly
  2. Quietly
  3. Quiteely
  4. Quietly

Answer: 4. Quietly

2.

  1. Skarf
  2. Scarff
  3. Scarf
  4. Scerff

Answer: 3. Scarf

3.

  1. Snifed
  2. Sniffed
  3. Sniifed
  4. Snniffed

Answer: 2. Sniffed

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 4: Seeing Without Seeing Explanation and Answers

4.

  1. Froward
  2. Fore wourd
  3. Furward
  4. Forward

Answer: 4. Forward

5.

  1. Difficulties
  2. Difficulties
  3. Difficulties
  4. Difficulties

Answer: 1. Difficulties

Question 6. The following words have been taken from the chapter and are jumbled. Rearrange them properly.

  1. IUEQT
  2. NTFOR
  3. TREOMH
  4. WRFOLE
  5. LMSIUAC

Answer:

  1. QUIET
  2. FRONT
  3. MOTHER
  4. FLOWER
  5. MUSICAL

Question 7. Match the pictures given in Column A with their use given in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing Match The Pictures Given In Column A With Their Use GIven In Column B

Answer: 1-B, 2-C, 3-D, 4-E, 5-A

Seeing Without Seeing in NCERT Class 2 English: Key Concepts and Solutions

Question 8. Our eyes do so much for us. We should take care of our eyes. Given below are some activities related to the eyes.

Put a ✓ for whatever is good for our eyes.

Put a ✘ for whatever is not good for our eyes.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing Choose Whatever Is Good And Notgood For Our Eyes

Answer:

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing Whatever Is Good And Notgood For Our Eyes

NCERT Solutions for Class 2 English Mridang Chapter 4: Seeing Without Seeing

Question 9. Use ‘A’ or ‘An’ before the words given below the images.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing Use A Or An Before The Words

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 4: Seeing Without Seeing Activity and Solutions

Answer:

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 4 Seeing Without Seeing A Or An Use Before The Words

 

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 2 Picture Reading

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 2 Picture Reading

Let Us Do!

Question 1. Observe the picture given below and answer the following question.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 2 Picture Reading Childrens In Their Picture

Picture Reading NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 2 Summary and Solutions

1. What do you see in the given image?
Answer: We see an image of children playing different games.

2. How many children are there in the picture?
Answer: There are 17 children

3. What games do you Play?
Answer: Do it yourself.

Let us Read!

Read the story given below and answer the questions that follow.

Out! Out!

It was a holiday. Jeet and Babli were playing. They played many games. Both of them skipped the rope. They played hide and seek. Babli and Jeet decided to play ‘bat and ball’.

Jeet got ready to throw the ball. Jeet threw the ball. Babli hit the ball. The ball went into Mohit’s garden. But his house was locked. They could not find the ball. So the game stopped.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 2 Picture Reading Babli And Jeet Decided To Play Bat And Ball

Babli knew how to make a ball. They got a few rags, paper, and wool. Babli also brought a piece of string. She rolled rags, paper, and wool to make a ball. Then she tied the ball with a string. They liked the new ball. The game started again. This time Babli picked the ball.

Jeet picked the bat. Babli threw the ball. Jeet hit the ball hard. The ball opened up and scattered in the air! Babli jumped and caught a piece of rag. She jumped and shouted, “OUT! OUT!”

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 2: Picture Reading

Question 2. Tick the (✓) correct option.

1. Jeet and Babli played _____ games.

  1. Two
  2. Six
  3. Four
  4. Many

Answer: 4. Many

2. Jeet got_____ to throw the ball.

  1. Steady
  2. Ready
  3. Late
  4. Lazy

Answer: 2. Ready

3. Hit the ball into the garden.

  1. Babli
  2. Jeet
  3. Mohit
  4. Preet

Answer: 1. Babli

NCERT Class 2 Picture Reading Chapter 2 Explanation and Answers

Question 3. State ‘T’ for True and ‘F’ for False statements.

1. Jeet and Babli were dancing.
Answer: False

2. Mohit’s house was locked.
Answer: True

3. Jeet knew how to make a ball.
Answer: False

4. The game did not start again.
Answer: False

5. Jeet got out.
Answer: True

Question 4. Read the story and number the following sentences in their correct order.

  1. Babli hit the ball.
  2. Jeet threw the ball.
  3. The ball went into Mohit’s garden.
  4. Jeet got ready to throw the ball.
  5. They lost the ball.

Answer:

3. The ball went into Mohit’s garden.

2. Jeet threw the ball.

4. Jeet got ready to throw the ball.

1. Babli hit the ball.

5. They lost the ball.

Question 5. Read the parts of the story and answer the following.

Babli and Jeet decided to play ‘bat and ball’. Jeet got ready to throw the ball. Jeet threw the ball. Babli hit the ball.

1. What were Babli and Jeet playing before this?
Answer: Babli and Jeet were playing hide and seek before this.

2. Write the opposite word ‘throw’.
Answer: Catch

Picture Reading in NCERT Class 2 English: Key Concepts and Solutions

Question 6. On the basis of the chapter answer the following questions.

1. When did Jeet and Babli play ‘bat and ball’? (On a holiday/On Saturday/On Sunday)
Answer: Jeet and Babli play ‘bat and ball’ on a holiday.

2. Where did the ball go? (Jeet’s house / Mohit’s garden / Babli’s garden)
Answer: The ball went into Mohit’s garden.

3. Who could not find the ball? (Jeet / Babli / Both Jeet and Babli)
Answer: Both Jeet and Babli could not find the ball.

4. What was used to tie the new ball? (Rubber band / String / Tape)
Answer: String was used to tie the new ball

5. Why did Babli jump? (To catch a bird / To catch a Kite / To catch a piece of rag)
Answer: Babli jumped to catch a piece of rag.

Question 7. Circle the words along with which we will use ‘an’.

  • Man
  • House
  • Book
  • Hen
  • Umbrella
  • Elephant
  • Kettle
  • Ant
  • Eraser
  • Well
  • Ox
  • Inkpot

Answer: Umbrella, Elephant, Ant, Eraser, Ox, Inkpot

NCERT English Class 2: Picture Reading Chapter 2 Mridang Solutions

Question 8. Make a sentence of your own using each of the given words.

1. Rope
Answer: I tied a rope around the pole.

2. Ready
Answer: Have you got ready, Shamshu?

3. Find
Answer: Can you find me?

4. Rolled
Answer: I rolled a piece of paper.

5. Scattered
Answer: Alina scattered the pages of the newspaper.

NCERT Solutions for Class 2 English Mridang Chapter 2: Picture Reading

Question 9. Complete the following words given in the chapter.

  1. H_D_
  2. HO_ID_Y
  3. T_R_W
  4. L_CK_D
  5. PI_K__

Answer:

  1. HIDE
  2. HOLIDAY
  3. THREW
  4. LOCKED
  5. PICKED

Question 10. See the picture given below from the story and answer the questions based on it.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 2 Picture Reading Childrens Are Playing

1. Name the children seen in the picture.
Answer: Babli and Jeet

2. What is the girl in the picture doing?
Answer: The girl in the picture is making a ball.

Picture Reading NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 2 Questions and Answers

Question 11. Join the sentences using ‘and’. Write in the given space. One has been done for you.

Example: I like to eat mangoes. I like to eat grapes.

Answer: I like to eat mangoes and grapes.

1. I had dinner. I went to sleep.
Answer: I had dinner and went to sleep

2. The cat sat on the mat. The dog sat on the mat.
Answer: The cat and dog sat on the mat.

3. Pooja is sitting. Pooja is eating.
Answer: Pooja is sitting and eating

4. There are tables in my classroom. There are chairs in my classroom.
Answer: There are tables and chairs in my classroom.

5. This ball has yellow dots on it. This ball also has green dots on it.
Answer: This ball has yellow and green dots on it.

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 2: Picture Reading Activity and Solutions

Question 12. Match the pictures in Column A with what they are about in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 2 Picture Reading Match The Pictures In Column A With Column B

Answer: 1-B, 2-C, 3-D, 4-A

 

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 3 It Is Fun

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 3 It Is Fun

Let Us Recite!

It’s fun to be this,
It’s fun to be that,
To leap like a lamb,
To climb like a cat.

To hop like a frog,
To swim like a fish,
To trot like a horse,
To fly like a bird.

I can act
Just like them all,
It’s fun to be this,
It’s fun to be that.

It Is Fun NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 3 Summary and Solutions

Question 1. Tick (✓) the correct option.

1. The child likes to climb like a _______

  1. Dog
  2. Cat
  3. Fox
  4. Frog/Horse/Fish

Answer: 2. Cat

2. It’s fun to be this and ________

  1. Those
  2. These
  3. That
  4. All

Answer: 3. That

3. A _____ can fly.

  1. Fish
  2. Horse
  3. Lamb
  4. Bird

Answer: 4. Bird

Question 2. State ‘T’ for True and ‘F’ for False statements.

1. A lamb cannot leap.
Answer: False

2. The child can act like a deer.
Answer: False

3. It is fun to be fly like a bird for a child.
Answer: True

4. A child cannot trot.
Answer: True

Question 3. On the basis of the poem give answers to the following questions.

1. Who can hop? (Fish/Frog/Florse)
Answer: Frog

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 3: It Is Fun

2. Who can act? (Horse/Lamb/The child)
Answer: The child

3. Which two animals given in the poem live in water? (Frog/Horse/Fish)
Answer: Frog and Fish

Question 4. Match the picture given in Column A with the type of movements they make given in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 3 It Is Fun Match The Pictures Given In Column A With The Type Of Movements They Make Given In Column B

Answer: 1-B, 2-A, 3-D, 4-E, 5-C

Question 5. Match the animals given in column A with the sound they make given in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 3 It Is Fun Match The Animals Given A Column A With The Sound They Make With Column B

Answer: 1-C, 2-A, 3-D, 4-B, 5-E

It Is Fun Class 2 English Chapter 3 Explanation and Answers

Let us Write!

Question 6. Write the plural of the following words.

  1. Cat
  2. Fish
  3. Horse
  4. Lamb

Answer:

  1. Cats
  2. Fishes
  3. Horses
  4. Lambs

Question 7. The following words have been taken from the poem and are jumbled. Rearrange them properly.

  1. ISTH
  2. EKU
  3. EHOSR
  4. PLEA
  5. TCA

Answer:

  1. THIS
  2. LIKE
  3. HORSE
  4. LEAP
  5. CAT

NCERT Solutions for Class 2 English Mridang: It Is Fun

Question 8. Match the words given in Column A that rhyme with the words from the poem given in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 3 It Is Fun Match The Words GIven In Column A That Rhyme With Words From Poem In Column B

Answer: 1-D, 2-E, 3-C, 4-B, 5-A

It Is Fun NCERT Class 2 English: Key Concepts and Solutions

Picture Reading!

Question 9. Write any 5 sentences about the picture.

Answer:

  1. There are many fish in the sea.
  2. There is one mermaid in the sea.
  3. There are three people sitting in a submarine.
  4. One diver is swimming in the sea.
  5. There are different types of water animals in the sea.

 

 

NCERT Class 2 English Mridang Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle

Let us Recite!

I have a red bicycle.
I pedal and I ride.
Trin… trin… trin… goes the bell.
It makes my friends move aside.

The seat is blue,
The tires and pedals are black.
Sometimes fast, slow,
But my bicycle is always on track.

To keep my bicycle moving,
All I need is some air.
I put on my little helmet,
And go happily everywhere.

My Bicycle NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 1 Solutions

Let Us Do!

Question 1. Tick (✓) the correct option.

1. The poem is about

  1. A boy
  2. A girl
  3. A bicycle
  4. A tricycle

Answer: 3. A bicycle (✓)

2. The pedals of the bicycle are

  1. Blue
  2. Green
  3. Red
  4. Black

Answer: 4. Black (✓)

3. The child rides the bicycle on the

  1. Track
  2. Wood
  3. Sand
  4. Road

Answer: 1. Track

4. Some _______ is needed to keep the bicycle moving.

  1. Water
  2. Air
  3. Oil
  4. Seat

Answer: 2. Air (✓)

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 1 My Bicycle: Summary and Answers

Question 2. Answer the following questions.

1. What is the color of the bicycle? (Green/Black/Red)
Answer: The color of the bicycle is red.

2. How does the child ride the bicycle? ( Fast/Slow/Fast and Slow)
Answer: The child rides the bicycle fast and slow.

3. Does a child riding a bicycle have friends? (No/Yes)
Answer: Yes

4. What happens when the child rings the bell? (His parents move aside/His friends move aside)
Answer: When the child rings the bell, his friends move aside.

Question 3. Put a (✓) for the correct sentences and a (✘) for the incorrect sentences.

1. The child has two bicycles.
Answer: ✘

2. The bicycle’s bell goes grin…grin…grin.
Answer: ✘

3. The seat of the bicycle is blue.
Answer: ✓

4. The child is happy riding the bicycle.
Answer: ✓

My Bicycle: NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 1 Complete Solutions

Question 4. Add ‘A’ or ‘An’ before the words.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle An And A Alphabets

Answer:

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle A And An Alphabets

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 1 My Bicycle Question and Answers

Question 5. Can you circle the words with which we will use ‘a’?

  • Crow
  • Bell
  • Almond
  • Bee
  • Owl
  • Book
  • Egg
  • Orange
  • Pear
  • Inkpot
  • Banana
  • Cake
  • IglooPen

Answer:

Crow, Bell, Bee, Book, Pear, Banana, Cake, Pen

Question 6. Complete the following words used in the poem.

  1. B _C _ C _E
  2. H _ L _ E _
  3. _ S_ DE
  4. SO _ ET _ ME
  5. EV _ RY _ HE _ E

Answer:

  1. BICYCLE
  2. HELMET
  3. ASIDE
  4. SOMETIMES
  5. EVERYWHERE

Class 2 NCERT English My Bicycle Solutions for Kids

Question 7. As you know a bicycle is made up of many parts. A few words are given below. Circle the words that make up a bicycle.

  • Track, 
  • Seat
  • Helmet
  • Air
  • Pedals
  • Brakes
  • Ball
  • Bell
  • Cage
  • Tires
  • Carrier

Answer: Seat, Pedals, Brakes, Bell, Tyres, Carrier

Chapter 1 My Bicycle NCERT Class 2 English Solutions

Question 8. Fill in the blanks with the help of the clues given below. (road, helmet, footpath, traffic signals, zebra crossing)

1. We should always cross the road at the _______
Answer: zebra crossing

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle Cross The Road At Zebra Crossing

NCERT Class 2 English Chapter 1 My Bicycle: Activities and Answers

2. While riding a bicycle always wear a _______
Answer: Helmet

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle Riding A Bicycle Always Wear A Helment

3. Always obey ________ while driving on the road.
Answer: traffic signals

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle Always Obey A Traffic Signals While Driving On The Road

NCERT Solutions for Class 2 English My Bicycle

4. Children should not play on ______
Answer: roads

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle Children Should Not Play On Road

5. While walking next to the road, stay on the _______
Answer: footpath

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle While Walking Next To The Road, Stay On The Footpath

My Bicycle NCERT Class 2 English: Vocabulary and Comprehension

Question 9. Match the words given in Column A with their opposite given in Column B.

Mridang Class 2 English Solutions Chapter 1 My Bicycle Match The Columns

Answer: 1-B, 2-D, 3-E, 4-C, 5-A

 

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Exercise 1 Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Flux And Faraday’s Laws Of Electromagnetic Induction

Question 1. The horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is 3 × 10-5 Wb/m2. The magnetic flux linked with a coil of area 1 m2 and having 5 turns, whose plane is normal to the magnetic field, will be

  1. 3 x 10-5 Wb
  2. 5 x 10-5 Wb
  3. 15 x 10-5 Wb
  4. 1 x 10-5 Wb

Answer: 3. 15 x 10-5 Wb

Question 2. Tesla is a unit of

  1. Magnetic flux
  2. Magnetic flux density
  3. Electric flux
  4. Self-inductance

Answer: 2. Magnetic flux density

Question 3. The formula of the induced emf due to the rate of change of magnetic flux passing through a coil will be

  1. \(e=-\frac{d}{d t}(\vec{B} \cdot \vec{A})\)
  2. \(e=\frac{\overrightarrow{d B}}{d t}\)
  3. \(e=-\vec{A} \cdot\left(\frac{\overrightarrow{d B}}{d t}\right)\)
  4. \(\mathrm{e}=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Answer: 1. \(e=-\frac{d}{d t}(\vec{B} \cdot \vec{A})\)

Question 4. A cube of side a is placed in a magnetic field of intensity B. The magnetic flux emerging out(outgoing flux only) of the cube will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Cube Of Side A Is Placed In A Magnetic Field Of Intensity B

  1. Ba2
  2. –Ba2
  3. 2Ba2
  4. Zero

Answer: 1. Ba8

Electromagnetic Induction MCQs for NEET Physics Class 12

Question 5. The figure represents an area A = 0.5m2 situated in a uniform magnetic field B = 2.0 weber/m2 and making an angle of 60º with respect to the magnetic field. The value of the magnetic flux through the area would be equal to

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Value Of Magnetic Flux Through The Area

  1. 2.0 weber
  2. √3 weber
  3. 3/2 weber
  4. 0.5 weber

Answer: 4. 0.5 Weber

Question 6. If Φ = 0.02 cos 100 πt weber/turns and the number of turns is 50 in the coil, the maximum induced emf is

  1. 314 volt
  2. 100 volt
  3. 31.4 volt
  4. 6.28 volt

Answer: 1. 314 volt

Question 7. The magnetic flux linked with the coil varies with time as Φ = 3t² + 4t + 9. The magnitude of induced emf at t = 2 seconds is

  1. 4V
  2. 3V
  3. 16 V
  4. 9 V

Answer: 3. 16 V

Question 8. A conducting square loop of side land resistance R moves in its plane with a uniform velocity v perpendicular to one of its sides. A uniform and constant magnetic field B exists perpendicular to the plane of the loop in Figure. The current induced in the loop is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rod AB Moved With A Uniform Velocity In A Uniform Magnetic Field

  1. \(\text { Blv/R clockwise }\)
  2. \(\text { Blv/R anticlockwise }\)
  3. \(\text { 2Blv/R anticlockwise }\)
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 9. A long conductor AB lies along the axis of a circular loop of radius R. If the current in the conductor AB varies at the rate of I ampere/second, then the induced emf in the loop is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Long Conductor AB Lies Along The Axis Of A Circular Loop Of Radius

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{IR}}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 I R}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \pi \mathrm{IR}}{2}\)
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 10. The magnetic flux through a circuit of resistance R changes by an amount ΔΦ in a time At. Then the total quantity of electric charge Q that passes any point in the circuit during the time Δt is represented by

  1. \(\mathrm{Q}=\frac{\Delta \phi}{\mathrm{R}}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{Q}=\frac{\Delta \phi}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
  3. \(Q=R \cdot \frac{\Delta \phi}{\Delta t}\)
  4. \(Q=\frac{1}{R} \cdot \frac{\Delta \phi}{\Delta t}\)

Answer: 1. \(Q=\frac{1}{R} \cdot \frac{\Delta \phi}{\Delta t}\)

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Lenz’s Law

Question 1. Lenz’s law is based on the law of conservation of

  1. Charge
  2. Momentum
  3. Mass
  4. Energy

Answer: 4. Energy

Question 2. A bar magnet is dropped vertically downward through a metal ring held horizontally. The acceleration of the falling magnet will be

  1. Equal to g
  2. Greater than g
  3. Less than g
  4. Dependent on the radius of the ring

Answer: 3. Less than g

Question 3. Two identical coils A and B are arranged coaxially as shown in the figure and the sign convention adopted is that the direction of currents are taken as positive when they flow in the direction of arrows. Which of the following statements is correct

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Identical Cois A And B Are Arranged Coaxially

  1. If A carries a steady positive current and A is moved towards B, then a positive current is induced in B.
  2. If A carries a steady positive current and B is moved towards A, then a negative current is induced in B
  3. If both coils carry a positive current, then the coils repel each other.
  4. If a positive current flowing in A is switched off, then a negative current is induced momentarily in B

Answer: 2. If A carries a steady positive current and B is moved towards A, then a negative current is induced in B

Question 4. An electron passes near a ring and approaches to ring, then the direction of the induced current in the ring is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction An Electron Is Passing Near A Ring And Approached To Ring

  1. Clockwise
  2. Anticlockwise
  3. Both (1) and (2)
  4. No current

Answer: 2. Both (1) and (2)

Question 5. A magnet is taken towards a coil-

  1. Rapidly
  2. Slowly

Then the induced emf is

  1. More in (1)
  2. Less in (1)
  3. Same in both (1) and (2)
  4. It more or less depends on the radius

Answer: 1. More in (1)

Question 6. The north pole of a magnet is brought near a metallic ring as shown. The direction of the induced current in the ring will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction North Pole Of A Magnet Is Brought Near A Metallic Ring

  1. Anticlockwise from the magnet side
  2. Clockwise from the magnet side
  3. First anticlockwise and then clockwise from the magnet side
  4. First clockwise and then anticlockwise from the magnet side

Answer: 1. Anti-clockwise from magnet side

Question 7. When a magnet is moved with its north pole towards a coil placed in a closed circuit, then the nearest face of the coil-

  1. Shows south polarity
  2. Shows north polarity
  3. Shows no polarity
  4. Shows sometimes north and sometimes south polarity

Answer: 2. Shows north polarity

Question 8. Consider the situation shown. If the switch is closed and after some time it is opened again, the closed loop will show

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Switch IS Closed And After Some Time It Is Opened Again The Closed Loop Will Show

  1. An anticlockwise current-pulse
  2. A clockwise current-pulse
  3. An anticlockwise current-pulse and then a clockwise current-pulse
  4. A clockwise current-pulse and then an anticlockwise current-pulse

Answer: 4. A clockwise current-pulse and then an anticlockwise current-pulse

Question 9. Solve the previous question if the closed loop is completely enclosed in the circuit containing the switch.

  1. An anticlockwise current-pulse
  2. A clockwise current-pulse
  3. An anticlockwise current-pulse and then a clockwise current-pulse
  4. A clockwise current-pulse and then an anticlockwise current-pulse

Answer: 3. An anticlockwise current-pulse and then a clockwise current-pulse

Question 10. A small, conducting circular loop is placed inside a long solenoid carrying a current. The plane of the loop contains the axis of the solenoid. If the current in the solenoid is varied, the current induced in the loop is

  1. Clockwise
  2. Anticlockwise
  3. Zero
  4. Clockwise or anticlockwise depending on whether the resistance is increased or decreased.

Answer: 3. Zero

Question 11. Shows a horizontal solenoid connected to a battery and a switch. A copper ring is placed on a frictionless track, the axis of the ring being along the axis of the solenoid. As the switch is closed, the ring will

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Horizontal Solenoid Conneted To A battery And ASwitch

  1. Remain stationary
  2. Move towards the solenoid
  3. Move away from the solenoid
  4. Move towards the solenoid or away from it depending on which terminal (positive or negative) of the battery is connected to the left end of the solenoid.

Answer: 3. Move away from the solenoid

Question 12. Two circular coils A and B are facing each other as shown in the figure. The current I through A can be altered

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Circular Coils A And B Are Facing Each Other

  1. There will be repulsion between a and b if I is increased
  2. There will be an attraction between a and b if I am increased
  3. There will be neither attraction nor repulsion when I changed
  4. Attraction or repulsion between a and b depends on the direction of the current. It does not depend on whether the current is increased or decreased.

Answer: 1. There will be repulsion between a and b if I am increased

Question 13. Two identical conductors P and Q are placed on two frictionless fixed conducting rails R and S in a uniform magnetic field directed into the plane. If P is moved in the direction shown in the figure with a constant speed, then rod Q

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Identical Conductors P And Q Are Placed On Two Frictionless

  1. Will be attracted towards P
  2. Will be repelled away from P
  3. will remain stationary
  4. Maybe repelled or attracted toward P

Answer: 1. Will be attracted toward P

Question 14. In the figure shown, the magnet is pushed towards the fixed ring along the axis of the ring and it passes through the ring.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnet Is Pushed Towards The Fixed Ring ALong The Axis Of The Ring

  1. When the magnet goes towards the ring face B becomes the south pole and face A becomes the north pole
  2. When the magnet goes away from the ring face B becomes the north pole and face A becomes the south pole
  3. When the magnet goes away from the ring face A becomes the north pole and face B becomes the south pole
  4. The face A will always be a north pole.

Answer: 3. When the magnet goes away from the ring face A becomes the north pole and face B becomes the south pole

Class 12 NEET Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction MCQs

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Induced Emf In A Moving Rod In Uniform Magnetic Field

Question 1. A wire of length 2m is moving with a velocity of 1 m/s normal to a magnetic field of 0.5 Wb/m². The emf induced in it will be – \((\ell \perp \vec{v})\)

  1. 0.5 V
  2. 0.1V
  3. 2 V
  4. 1 V

Answer: 4. 1 V

Question 2. An airplane having a distance of 50 m between the edges of its wings is flying horizontally with a speed of 720 km/hour. If the vertical component of the earth’s magnetic field is 2 x 10-4 Wb/m2, then the induced emf will be

  1. 2mV
  2. 2V
  3. 200V
  4. 0.2mV

Answer: 2. 2V

Question 3. A straight conductor of length 0.4 m is moved in a magnetic field of 0.9 weber/m² with a velocity of 7 m/s. The maximum EMF induced in the conductor will be

  1. 2.52 V
  2. 25 V
  3. 2.8 V
  4. 63 V

Answer: 1. 2.52 V

Question 4. An athlete runs at a velocity of 30 km/hr. towards the east with a 3-meter rod. The horizontal component of the earth is 4 × 10-5 weber/m². If he runs, keep the rod

  1. Horizontal and
  2. Vertical, the p.d. at the ends of the rod in both cases, will be
  1. Zero in the vertical case and 1 × 10-3 V in the horizontal case.
  2. 1 × 10-3 V in the vertical case and zero in the horizontal case.
  3. Zero in both cases.
  4. 1 × 10-3 V in both the cases.

Answer: 2. 1 × 10-3 V in the vertical case and zero in the horizontal case.

Question 5. A conducting wire is moving in a magnetic field B towards the right. The direction of the induced current is shown in the figure. The direction of the magnetic field will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Conducting Wire Is Moving In A Magnetic Field

  1. In the plane of paper pointing towards the right.
  2. In the plane of paper pointing towards the left.
  3. Perpendicular and downwards to the plane of the paper.
  4. Perpendicular to the plane of the paper and upwards.

Answer: 3. Perpendicular and downwards to the plane of paper.

Question 6. A conducting rod is moved with a constant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) in a magnetic field. A potential difference appears across the two ends

  1. if \(\bar{u} \| \vec{\ell}\)
  2. if \(\vec{v} \| \vec{B}\)
  3. if \(\vec{\ell} \| \vec{B}\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 4. if \(\vec{\ell} \| \vec{B}\)

Question 7. A uniform magnetic field exists in the region given by \(\vec{B}=3 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}\). A rod of length 5 m is placed along the y−axis and is moved along the x−axis with a constant speed of 1 m/sec. Then induced e.m.f. in the rod will be:

  1. Zero
  2. 25 v
  3. 20 v
  4. 15 v

Answer: 2. 25 v

Question 8. A rod AB moves with a uniform velocity v in a uniform magnetic field as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rod AB Moved With A Uniform Velocity In A Uniform Magnetic Field

  1. The rod becomes electrically charged
  2. The End A becomes positively charged
  3. End B becomes positively charged
  4. The rod becomes hot because of Joule heating

Answer: 2. The end A becomes positively charged

Question 9. The distance between the ends of the wings of an airplane is 5m. The airplane is moving with a velocity of 200 km/sec in a magnetic field of 10T. The emf induced across the ends of wings will be:

  1. 107 volt
  2. 10 volt
  3. 106 volt
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 107 volt

Question 10. A straight conductor of length 4m moves at a speed of 10m/s. When the conductor makes an angle of 30° with the direction of the magnetic field of induction of 0.1 wb. per m2 then induced emf is:

  1. 8V
  2. 4V
  3. 1V
  4. 2V

Answer: 4. 2V

Question 11. As a result of a change in the magnetic flux linked to the closed loop shown in the figure, an emf V volt is induced in the loop. The work done (joules) in taking a charge Q coulomb once along the loop is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnetic Flux Lined To The Closed Loop

  1. QV
  2. Zero
  3. 2QV
  4. 5QV

Answer: 1. QV

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Circuit Problems And Mechanics

Question 1. AB and CD are fixed conducting smooth rails placed in a vertical plane and joined by a constant current source at its upper end. PQ is a conducting rod that is free to slide on the rails. A horizontal uniform magnetic field exists in space as shown. If the rod PQ is released from rest then,

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Rod PQ May Move Downward With Constant Temperature

  1. The rod PQ may move downward with constant acceleration
  2. The rod PQ may move upward with constant acceleration
  3. The rod will move downward with decreasing acceleration and finally acquire a constant velocity
  4. Either A or B.

Answer: 4. Either A or B.

Question 2. A metallic rod completes its circuit as shown in the figure. The circuit is normal to a magnetic field of B = 0.15 tesla. If the resistance is 3Q the force required to move the rod with a constant velocity of 2 m/sec is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Metalic Rod Completed Its Circuit

  1. 3.75 x 10-3 N
  2. 3.75 x 10-2 N
  3. 3.75 x 102 N
  4. 3.75 x 10-4 N

Answer: 1. 3.75 x 10-3 N

Question 3. Consider the situation shown in the figure. The wire AB is slid on the fixed rails with a constant velocity. If the wire AB is replaced by a semicircular wire, the magnitude of the induced current will

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnetic Of The Induced Current Will Remains The Same

  1. Increase
  2. Remain the same
  3. Decrease
  4. Increase or decrease depending on whether the semicircle bulges towards the resistance or away from it.

Answer: 2. Remain the same

Question 4. Shows a square loop of side 0.5 m and resistance 10Ω. The magnetic field on the left side of the line PQ has a magnitude B = 1.0T. The work done in pulling the loop out of the field uniformly in 2.0 s is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Work Done In Pulling The Loop Out Of The Field

  1. 3.125 x 10-3 J
  2. 6.25 x 10-4 J
  3. 1.25 x 10-2 J
  4. 5.0 x 10-4 J

Answer: 1. 3.125 x 10-3 J

Question 5. One conducting U tube can slide inside another as shown in the figure, maintaining electrical contacts between the tubes. The magnetic field B is perpendicular to the plane of the figure. If each tube is towards the other at a constant speed v, then the emf induced in the circuit in terms of B, l, and v, where l is the width of each tube, will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction One Conducting U Tube Can Slide Inside

  1. Blv
  2. -Blv
  3. Zero
  4. 2 Blv

Answer: 4. 2 Blv

NEET Physics Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 6 MCQs and Answers

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Induced Emf In A-Rod, Ring, Disc Rotating In A Uniform Magnetic Field

Question 1. A metal rod of length L is placed normally to a magnetic field and rotated in a circular path with frequency f. The potential difference between it ends will be

  1. πL²Bf
  2. BL/f
  3. πL²B/f
  4. fBL

Answer: 1. πL²Bf

Question 2. A rectangular coil ABCD is rotated anti-clockwise with a uniform angular velocity about the axis shown in the figure. The axis of rotation of the coil as well as the magnetic field B are horizontal. The induced emf in the coil would be maximum when

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The plane of the coil is horizontal

  1. The plane of the coil is horizontal
  2. The plane of the coil makes an angle of 45° with the direction of the magnetic field
  3. The plane of the coil is at right angles to the magnetic field
  4. The plane of the coil makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal

Answer: 1. The plane of the coil is horizontal

Question 3. A coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field such that its plane is parallel to the magnetic field. In time interval Δt its plane becomes perpendicular to the magnetic field, then induced charge q in coil depends on the time interval Δt as

  1. \(q \alpha \Delta t\)
  2. \(q \alpha \frac{1}{\Delta t}\)
  3. \(q \alpha(\Delta t)^0\)
  4. \(q \alpha(\Delta t)^2\)

Answer: 3. \(q \alpha(\Delta t)^0\)

Question 4. A metallic conductor of 1 m length is rotated vertically its one end at an angular velocity of 5 rad/sec. If the horizontal component of the earth’s field is 0.2 x 10-4 T, the voltage generated between the ends of the conductor will be

  1. 5 mV
  2. 5 x 10-4 V
  3. 50 mV
  4. 50 μ V

Answer: 4. 50 μ V

Question 5. A rectangular coil has 60 turns and its length and width are 20 cm and 10 cm respectively. The coil rotates at a speed of 1800 rotations per minute in a uniform magnetic field of 0.5 tesla. Then the maximum induced emf will be

  1. 98 V
  2. 110 V
  3. 113 V
  4. 118 V

Answer: 3. 113 V

Question 6. The resistance of a coil is 5 ohm and a current of 0.2 A is induced in it due to a varying magnetic field. The rate of change of magnetic flux in it will be –

  1. 0.5 Wb/s
  2. 0.05 Wb/s
  3. 1 Wb/s
  4. 20 Wb/s

Answer: 3. 1 Wb/s

Question 7. A rod of length l rotates with a uniform angular velocity ra about its perpendicular bisector. A uniform magnetic field B exists parallel to the axis of rotation. The potential difference between the two ends of the rod is

  1. Zero
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} \omega \mathrm{B} \ell^2\)
  3. \(B \omega \ell^2\)
  4. \(2 \mathrm{~B} \omega \ell^2\)

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 8. A semicircular wire of radius R is rotated with constant angular velocity ω about an axis passing through one end and perpendicular to the plane of the wire. There is a uniform magnetic field of strength B. The induced e.m.f. between the ends is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Semicircular Wire Of Radius Is rotated With Constant Anglular Velocity

  1. B ωR²/2
  2. 2 B ωR²
  3. Is variable
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 2 B ωR²

Question 9. A coil having n turns and resistance R Ω is connected with a galvanometer of resistance 4RΩ. This combination is moved in time t seconds from a magnetic field W1 Weber/m² to W2 Weber/m². The induced current in the circuit is:

  1. \(\frac{\left(W_2-W_1\right) A}{5 R n t}\)
  2. \(-\frac{n\left(W_2-W_1\right) A}{5 R t}\)
  3. \(-\frac{\left(W_2-W_1\right) A}{\text { Rnt }}\)
  4. \(-\frac{n\left(W_2-W_1\right) A}{R t}\)

Answer: 2. \(-\frac{n\left(W_2-W_1\right) A}{5 R t}\)

Question 10. A metal conductor of length 1 m rotates vertically about one of its ends at an angular velocity of 5 radians per second. If the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is 0.2 x 10-4 T, then the emf developed between the two ends of the conductor is:

  1. 5 μV
  2. 50 μV
  3. 5 mV
  4. 50 mV

Answer: 2. 50 μV

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Fixed Loop In A Time-Varying Magnetic Field And Induced Electric Field

Question 1. A coil of 100 turns having an average area of 100 cm² for each turn is held in a uniform field of 50 gauss, the direction of the field being at right angles to the plane of the coil. If the field is removed in 0.01 sec, then the average e.m.f induced in the coil is

  1. 0.5 V
  2. 10 V
  3. 20 V
  4. 50 V

Answer: 1. 0.5 V

Question 2. A coil is placed in the transverse magnetic field of 0.02 T. This coil starts shrinking at a rate of 1 mm/sec. When its radius is 4 cm, then what is the value of induced emf-

  1. 2 μV
  2. 2.5 μV
  3. 5 μV
  4. 8 μV

Answer: 3. 5 μV

Question 3. A uniform magnetic field of induction B is confined to a cylindrical region of radius R. The magnetic field is increasing at a constant rate of \(\frac{d B}{dt}\) (tesla/second). An electron of charge q, placed at the point P on the periphery of the field experiences an acceleration

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Uniform Magnetic Field Of Induction Is Confine To A Cylindrical Region Of Radius

  1. \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{e R}{m} \frac{d B}{d t}\) toward left
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{eR}}{\mathrm{m}} \frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) toward right
  3. \(\frac{e R}{m} \frac{d B}{d t}\) toward left
  4. Zero

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{e R}{m} \frac{d B}{d t}\) toward left

Question 4. A uniform but time-varying magnetic field B (t) exists in a circular region of radius a and is directed into the plane of the paper, as shown figure. The magnitude of the induced electric field at point P at a distance r from the center of the circular region.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Uniform Time Varying magnetic Field

  1. Is zero
  2. Decreases as 1/r
  3. Increases as r
  4. Decreases as 1/r²

Answer: 2. Decreases as 1/r

Question 5. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.04 T with its plane perpendicular to the magnetic field. The radius of the loop starts shrinking at 2mms-1. The induced emf in the loop when the radius is 2 cm is

  1. 3.2 πμV
  2. 4.8 πμV
  3. 0.8 πμV
  4. 1.6 πμV

Answer: 1. 3.2 πμV

Question 6. In a uniform magnetic field of induction B, a wire in the form of a semicircle of radius r rotates about the diameter of the circle with angular frequency ω. If the total resistance of the circuit is R, the mean power generated per period of rotation is:

  1. \(\frac{B \pi^2 \omega}{2 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{B} \pi \mathrm{r}^2 \omega\right)^2}{8 \mathrm{R}}\)
  3. \(\frac{(B \pi r \omega)^2}{2 R}\)
  4. \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{B} \pi \omega^2\right)^2}{8 \mathrm{R}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{B} \pi \mathrm{r}^2 \omega\right)^2}{8 \mathrm{R}}\)

Electromagnetic Induction MCQs NEET Physics Class 12

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Self Induction, Self Inductance Self Induced Emf, And Magnetic Energy Density

Question 1. If the length and area of the cross-section of an inductor remain the same but the number of turns is doubled, its self-inductance will become

  1. Half
  2. Four times
  3. Double
  4. One-fourth

Answer: 2. Four times

Question 2. Dimensions of the coefficient of self-induction are

  1. MLT-2A-2
  2. ML-2T-2A-2
  3. ML2T-2A-2
  4. M2LT-2A-2

Answer: 3. ML2T-2A-2

Question 3. The self-inductance of a solenoid depends on

  1. The number of turns N of the coil
  2. The area of cross-section A and length l of the coil.
  3. The permeability of the core of the coil
  4. All the above

Answer: 3. The permeability of the core of the coil

Question 4. When the current flowing in a coil changes from 3A to 2A in one millisecond, 5-volt emf is induced in it. The self-inductance of the coil will be

  1. Zero
  2. 5kH
  3. 5H
  4. 5 mH

Answer: 4. 5 mH

Question 5. The equivalent inductance of two inductances is 2.4 Henry when connected in parallel and 10 Henry when connected in series. The difference between the two inductance is

  1. 2 henry
  2. 3 henry
  3. 4 henry
  4. 5 henry

Answer: 1. 2 henry

Question 6. In the figure magnetic energy stored in the coil is (in a steady state)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnetic Energy Stored In The Coil Is Steady State

  1. 0
  2. 25 joules
  3. None of these

Answer: 3. 25 joules

Question 7. The value of self-inductance of a coil is 5 henry. The value of the current changes from 1 ampere to 2 amperes in 5 seconds. The value of induced emf in it is

  1. 10 Volt
  2. 0.10 Volt
  3. 1.0 Volt
  4. 100 Volt

Answer: 3. 1.0 Volt

Question 8. The self-inductance of a solenoid of length L, area of cross-section A, and having N turns is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 N^2 A}{L}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 N A}{L}\)
  3. \(\mu_0 \mathrm{~N}^2 L A\)
  4. \(\mu_0 \mathrm{NAL}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 N^2 A}{L}\)

Question 9. A long solenoid has 200 turns per cm. and carries a current of 2.5 amps. The magnetic field at its centre is- [μ0 = 4π x 10-7 Weber/m2]

  1. 3.14 x 10-2 Weber/m2
  2. 6.28 x 10-2 Weber/m2
  3. 9.42 x 10-2 Weber/m2
  4. 12.56 x 10-2 Weber/m2

Answer: 2. 6.28 x 10-2 Weber/m2

Question 10. Energy is stored in the choke coil in the form of

  1. Heat
  2. Electric energy
  3. Magnetic energy
  4. Electro-magnetic energy

Answer: 3. Magnetic energy

Question 11. For an inductor coil L = 0.04 H then work done by the source to establish a current of 5A in it is

  1. 0.5 J
  2. 1.00 J
  3. 100 J
  4. 20 J

Answer: 2. 1.00 J

Question 12. Current passing through a coil is changing at the rate of 1.5 ampere per second. If it induces an emf of 45 volts, then the self-inductance of the coil will be

  1. 30 H
  2. 67.5 H
  3. 60 H
  4. 33.3 H

Answer: 1. 30 H

Question 13. An inductor coil stores energy U when a current i is passed through it and dissipates heat energy at the rate of P. The time constant of the circuit, when this coil is connected across a battery of zero internal resistance, is:

  1. \(\frac{4 U}{P}\)
  2. \(\frac{U}{P}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 U}{P}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 P}{U}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{2 U}{P}\)

Question 14. L, C, and R represent the physical quantities inductance, capacitance, and resistance. Which of the following combinations have dimensions of time?

  1. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{RC}}\)
  2. \(\frac{R}{L}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{L C}\)

Answer: 4.\(\sqrt{L C}\)

Question 15. Two inductors L1 and L1 are connected in parallel and a time varting current i flows as shown. The ratio of current i1/i2 at any time t is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Inductors Are Connected In Parallel And A Time Varying Current

  1. \(L_1 / L_2\)
  2. \(L_2 / L_1\)
  3. \(\frac{L_1^2}{\left(L_1+L_2\right)^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{L_2^2}{\left(L_1+L_2\right)^2}\)

Answer: 2. \(L_2 / L_1\)

Question 16. An LR circuit with a battery is connected at t =0. Which of the following quantities is not zero just after the connection?

  1. Current in the circuit
  2. Magnetic field energy in the inductor
  3. Power delivered by the battery
  4. emf induced in the inductor

Answer: 4. emf induced in the inductor

Question 17. When the current in the portion of the circuit shown in the figure is 2A and increasing at the rate of 1A/s, the measured potential difference Vab = 8V. However when the current is 2A and decreasing at the rate of 1A/s, the measured potential difference Vab= 4V. The values of R and L are:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction 3 ohm and 2 henries respectively

  1. 3 ohm and 2 henries respectively
  2. 2 ohm and 3 henries respectively
  3. 10 ohm and 6 henries respectively
  4. 6 ohm and 1 Henry respectively

Answer: 1. 3 ohm and 2 Henry respectively

Question 18. When the current changes from +2A to -2A in 0.05s, an emf of 8V is induced in a coil. The coefficient of self-induction of the coil is

  1. 0.2 H
  2. 0.4H
  3. 0.8H
  4. 0.1H

Answer: 4. 0.1H

Question 19. A coil of resistance R and inductance L is connected to a battery of emf E volt. The final current in the coil is

  1. E/R
  2. E/L
  3. \(\sqrt{E /\left(R^2+L^2\right)}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{E L}{\left(R^2+L^2\right)}}\)

Answer: 1. E/R

Question 20. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of the three situations shown in the figure. Their mutual inductance will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Circular Coils Can Be Arranged In Any Of Three Situations

  1. Maximum in situation (1)
  2. Maximum in situation (2)
  3. Maximum in situation (3)
  4. The same in all situations

Answer: 1. Maximum in situation (1)

Question 21. Which of the following is proportional to energy density in magnetic field B:

  1. \(\frac{1}{B}[latex]
  2. [latex]\frac{1}{\mathrm{~B}^2}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{B}\)
  4. \(B^2\)

Answer: 4. \(B^2\)

Question 22. In the given circuit find the ratio of i1 to i2. Where i1 is the initial (at t = 0) current, and i2 is steady state (at t = ∞) current through the battery:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Circuit Of The Ratio Current Through The Battery

  1. 1.0
  2. 0.8
  3. 1.2
  4. 1.5

Answer: 2. 0.8

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 MCQs: Electromagnetic Induction

Question 23. The inductance between A and D is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Inductance Betwee A And D

  1. 3.66 H
  2. 9 H
  3. 0.66 H
  4. 1 H

Answer: 4. 1 H

Question 24. In an oscillating LC circuit the maximum charge on the capacitor is Q. The charge on the capacitor when the energy is stored equally between the electric and magnetic field is:

  1. Q/2
  2. Q/√3
  3. Q/√2
  4. Q

Answer: 3. Q/√2

Question 25. An inductor (L = 100 mH), a resistor (R = 100 Ω), and a battery (E = 100 V) are initially connected in series as shown in the figure. After a long time, the battery is disconnected after short-circuiting the points A and B. The current in the circuit, 1 ms after the short circuit is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Short Circuit

  1. 1A
  2. 1/e A
  3. e A
  4. 0.1 A

Answer: 2. 1/e A

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Mutual Induction And Mutual Inductance

Question 1. The unit of mutual inductance is

  1. Volt
  2. Weber
  3. Tesla
  4. Henry

Answer: 4. Henry

Question 2. The self-inductances of two identical coils are 0.1 H. They are wound over each other. The mutual inductance will be

  1. 0.1 H
  2. 0.2 H
  3. 0.01 H
  4. 0.05 H

Answer: 1. 0.1 H

Question 3. Two conducting loops of radius R1 and R2 are concentric and are placed in the same plane. If R1>> R2 the mutual inductance M between them will be directly proportional to

  1. \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\)
  2. \(\frac{R_2}{R_1}\)
  3. \(\frac{R_1^2}{R_2}\)
  4. \(\frac{R_2^2}{R_1}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{R_2^2}{R_1}\)

Question 4. The mutual inductance between primary and secondary circuits is 0.5H. The resistance of the primary and the secondary circuits are 20Ω and 5Ω respectively. To generate a current of 0.4 A in the secondary, the current in the primary must be changed at the rate of

  1. 4.0 amp./sec.
  2. 16.0 amp./sec.
  3. 1.6 amp./sec.
  4. 8.0 amp./sec.

Answer: 1. 4.0 amp./sec.

Question 5. Two coils A and B having turned 300 and 600 respectively are placed near each other, on a passing current of 3.0 A in A, the flux linked with A is 1.2 x 10-4 Weber and with B it is 9.0 x 10-5 Weber. The mutual inductance of the system is

  1. 2 x 10-5 Henry
  2. 3 x 10-5 Henry
  3. 4 x 10-5 Henry
  4. 6 x 10-5 Henry

Answer: 2. 3 x 10-5 henry

Question 6. A steel wire of length l has magnetic moment M. It is bent into a semi-circle. Now its magnetic moment is

  1. \(\frac{2 M}{\pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{3 M}{2 \pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{M}{\pi}\)
  4. \(\frac{M}{2 \pi}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{2 M}{\pi}\)

Question 7. Two coils are placed close to each other. The mutual inductance of the pair of coils depends upon:

  1. The rates at which currents are changing in the two coils
  2. The relative position and orientation of the two coils
  3. The materials of the wires of the coils
  4. The currents in the two coils

Answer: 2. Relative position and orientation of the two coils

Question 8. Two inductance coils of inductance L1 and L2 are kept at sufficiently large distances apart. On connecting them in parallel their equivalent inductance will be

  1. \(\frac{L_1+L_2}{L_1 L_2}\)
  2. \(\frac{L_1 L_2}{L_1+L_2}\)
  3. \(L_1+L_2\)
  4. \(\sqrt{L_1 L_2}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{L_1 L_2}{L_1+L_2}\)

Question 9. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of the three situations shown in the figure. Their mutual inductance will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Circular Coils Can Be Arranged In Any Of Three Situations

  1. Maximum in situation (1)
  2. Maximum in situation (2)
  3. Maximum in situation (3)
  4. The same in all situations

Answer: 1. Maximum in situation (1)

Question 10. Two coils of self-inductances 2 mH and 8 mH are located so close together that the effective flux in one coil is completely linked with the other. The mutual inductance between these coils is:

  1. 10 mH
  2. 6 mH
  3. 4 mH
  4. 16 mH

Answer: 3. 4 mH

Question 11. A long solenoid has 500 turns. When a current of 2 A is passed through it, the resulting magnetic flux linked with each turn of the solenoid is 4 x 10-3 Wb. The self-inductance of the solenoid is

  1. 2.5 H
  2. 2.0 H
  3. 1.0 H
  4. 4.0 H

Answer: 3. 1.0 H

Question 12. Two coaxial solenoids are made by winding thin insulated wire over a pipe of cross-sectional area A =10cm² and length = 20 cm. If one of the solenoids has 300 turns and the other 400 turns, their mutual inductance is (μ0 = 4π x 10-7 T m A-1):

  1. 4.8π x 10-4 H
  2. 4.8π x 10-5 H
  3. 2.4π x 10-4 H
  4. 2.4π x 10-5 H

Answer: 2. 4.8π x 10-5 H

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Exercise 2 Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Question 1. A circular loop of radius R, carrying current I, lies in the x-y plane with its center at the origin. The total magnetic flux through the x-y plane is

  1. Directly proportional to I
  2. Directly proportional to R
  3. Directly proportional to R²
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 2. A square coil ACDE with its plane vertical is released from rest in a horizontal uniform magnetic field of length 2L. The acceleration of the coil is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Square Coil ACDE With Its Plane Vertical IS Released From Rest In A Horizontal Unoform

  1. Less than g for all the time till the loop crosses the magnetic field completely
  2. Less than g when it enters the field and greater than g when it comes out of the field
  3. g all the time
  4. Less than g when it enters and comes out of the field but equal to g when it is within the field

Answer: 4. Less than g when it enters and comes out of the field but equal to g when it is within the field

Question 3. A conducting ring lies fixed on a horizontal plane. If a charged nonmagnetic particle is released from a point (on the axis) at some height from the plane, then:

  1. An induced current will flow in a clockwise or anticlockwise direction in the loop depending upon the nature of the charge
  2. The acceleration of the particle will decrease as it comes down
  3. The rate of production of heat in the ring will increase as the particle comes down
  4. No heat will be produced in the ring.

Answer: 4. No heat will be produced in the ring.

Question 4. A bar magnet is released from rest coaxially along the axis of a very long, vertical copper tube. After some time the magnet

  1. Will stop in the tube
  2. Will move with almost constant speed
  3. Will move with an acceleration g
  4. Will oscillate

Answer: 2. Will move with almost constant speed

Question 5. In the given arrangement, the loop is moved with constant velocity v in a uniform magnetic field B in a restricted region of width a. The time for which the emf is induced in the circuit is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Loop Moved With Constant Veloxity In A Uniform Magnetic Field

  1. \(\frac{2 b}{v}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 a}{v}\)
  3. \(\frac{(a+b)}{v}\)
  4. \(\frac{2(a-b)}{v}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{2 a}{v}\)

Question 6. A metallic square loop ABCD is moving in its own plane with velocity v in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to its plane as shown in the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Matallic Square Loop

An electric field is induced

  1. In AD, but not in BC
  2. In BC, but not in AD
  3. Neither in AD nor in BC
  4. In both AD and BC

Answer: 4. In both AD and BC

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs on Electromagnetic Induction

Question 7. A constant force F is being applied on a rod of length ‘l’ kept at rest on two parallel conducting rails connected at ends by resistance R in uniform magnetic field B as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Constant Force F Is Being Applied On A Rod Of Length

  1. The power delivered by force will be constant with time
  2. The power delivered by force will increase first and then decrease
  3. The rate of power delivered by the external force will be increasing continuously
  4. The rate of power delivered by external force will be decreasing continuously.

Answer: 4. The rate of power delivered by external force will be decreasing continuously.

Question 8. A metal rod of resistance 20 Q is fixed along a diameter of conducting ring of radius 0.1 m and lies in the x- y plane. There is a magnetic field \(\vec{B}=(50 \mathrm{~T}) \hat{\mathrm{k}}\). The ring rotates with an angular velocity ω = 20 rad/s about its axis. An external resistance of 10 Ω is connected across the center of the ring and rim. The current through external resistance is

  1. \(\frac{1}{4} \mathrm{~A}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~A}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{~A}\)
  4. zero

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 9. The radius of the circular conducting loop shown in the figure is R. Magnetic field is decreasing at a constant rate a. Resistance per unit length of the loop is ρ. Then current in wire AB is (AB is one of the diameters)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Radius Of The Circular Conducting Loop

  1. \(\frac{R \alpha}{2 \rho}\) from A to B
  2. \(\frac{R \alpha}{2 p}\) from B to A
  3. \(\frac{2 R \alpha}{\rho}\) from A to B
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 10. Two different coils have self-inductance L1 = 8 mH, L2 = 2 mH. The current in one coil is increased at a constant rate. The current in the second coil is also increased at the same rate. At a certain instant of time, the power given to the two coils is the same. At that time the current, the induced voltage, and the energy stored in the first coil are i1, V1, and W1 respectively. Corresponding values for the second coil at the same instant are i2, V2, and W2 respectively. Then which is incorrect:

  1. \(i_1 i_2=\frac{1}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{i_1}{i_2}=4\)
  3. \(\frac{W_2}{W_1}=4\)
  4. \(\frac{V_2}{V_1}=\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{i_1}{i_2}=4\)

Question 11. In an LR circuit current at t = 0 is 20 A. After 2s it reduces to 18 A. The time constant of the circuit is (in second):

  1. \(\ln \left(\frac{10}{9}\right)\)
  2. 2
  3. \(\frac{2}{\ln \left(\frac{10}{9}\right)}\)
  4. \(2 \ln \left(\frac{10}{9}\right)\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{2}{\ln \left(\frac{10}{9}\right)}\)

Question 12. In the circuit shown in the figure, switch S is closed at t = 0. Then:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction After a long time interval current through the battery will be the same as the current through it initially

  1. After a long time interval, the potential difference across the capacitor and inductor will be equal.
  2. After a long time interval charge on the capacitor will be EC.
  3. After a long time interval current in the inductor will be E/R.
  4. After a long time interval current through the battery will be the same as the current through it initially.

Answer: 4. After a long time interval current through the battery will be the same as the current through it initially.

Question 13. The battery shown in the figure is ideal. The values are ε = 10 V, R = 5Ω, L = 2H . Initially, the current in the inductor is zero. The current through the battery at t = 2s is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Through The Battery

  1. 12 A
  2. 7 A
  3. 3 A
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 12 A

Question 14. Two coils are at fixed locations. When coil 1 has no current and the current in coil 2 increases at the rate of 15.0 A/s the e.m.f. in coil 1 is 25.0 mV, when coil 2 has no current and coil 1 has a current of 3.6 A, flux linkage in coil 2 is

  1. 16 mWb
  2. 10 mWb
  3. 4.00 mWb
  4. 6.00 mWb

Answer: 4. 6.00 mWb

Question 15. A long straight wire is placed along the axis of a circular ring of radius R. The mutual inductance of this system is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 R}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \pi R}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2}\)
  4. 0

Answer: 4. 0

Question 16. Two identical circular loops of metal wire are lying on a table without touching each other. Loop-A carries a current that increases with time. In response, the loop-B

  1. Remains stationary
  2. Is attracted by the loop-A
  3. Is repelled by the loop-A
  4. Rotates about its CM, with CM fixed

Answer: 3. Is repelled by the loop-A

Question 17. When two co-axial coils having the same current in the same direction are brought to each other, then the value of current in both coils:

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. First increases and then decreases
  4. Remain same

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 18. For the given arrangement (in the horizontal plane) the possible direction of the magnetic field:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Possible Direction Of Magnetic Field Is Vertically downward

  1. Towards right
  2. Towards left
  3. Vertically upward
  4. Vertically downward

Answer: 4. Vertically downward

Question 19. A magnetic field can be produced by

  1. A moving charge
  2. A changing electric field
  3. A stationary charge
  4. Both (1) and (2)

Answer: 4. Both (1) and (2)

Question 20. A coil of inductance 300 mH and resistance 2Ω is connected to a source of voltage 2V. The current reaches half of its steady state value in

  1. 0.05 s
  2. 0.1 s
  3. 0.15s
  4. 0.3 s

Answer: 2. 0.1 s

Question 21. If a bar magnet is dropping through the copper ring, then its velocity (gravity-free space):

  1. Decreases
  2. Increases
  3. Remain unaffected
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. Decreases

Question 22. Lenz’s law gives:

  1. The magnitude of the induced emf
  2. The direction of the induced current
  3. Both the magnitude and direction of the induced current
  4. The magnitude of the induced current

Answer: 2. The direction of the induced current

Question 23. The unit of mutual inductance of a coil can be expressed as:

  1. weber. amp
  2. weber/amp.
  3. weber meter
  4. weber/meter

Answer: 2. Weber/amp.

Question 24. A conducting ring is placed in a uniform magnetic field with its plane perpendicular to the field. An EMF is induced in the ring if

  1. It is rotated about its axis
  2. It is translated
  3. It is rotated about a diameter
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. It is rotated about a diameter

Electromagnetic Induction Multiple Choice Questions NEET Physics

Question 25. An equilateral triangular loop ADC having some resistance is pulled with a constant velocity v out of a uniform magnetic field directed into the paper. At time t = 0, the side DC of the loop is at the edge of the magnetic field. The induced current (i) versus time (t) graph will be as

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction An Equilateral Triangular Loop Having Some Resistance

Answer: 2

Question 26. Shows a conducting disc rotating about its axis in a perpendicular magnetic field B. A resistor of resistance R is connected between the center and the rim. The radius of the disc is 5.0 cm, angular speed ω = 40 rad/s, B = 0.10 T, and R = 1 Ω. The current through the resistor is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Through The Resistance

  1. 5 mA
  2. 50 A
  3. 5 A
  4. 10 mA

Answer: 1. 5 mA

Question 27. A rectangular loop of sides ‘a‘ and ‘b‘ is placed in the xy plane. A very long wire is also placed in the xy plane such that the side of the length ‘a‘ of the loop is parallel to the wire. The distance between the wire and the nearest edge of the loop is ‘d‘. The mutual inductance of this system is proportional to:

  1. a
  2. b
  3. 1/d
  4. Current in wire

Answer: 1. a

Question 28. Two inductor coils of self-inductance 3H and 6H respectively are connected with a resistance of 10Ω and a battery of 10V as shown in the figure. The ratio of the total energy stored at a steady state in the inductors to that of heat developed in resistance in 10 seconds at the steady state is(neglecting mutual inductance between L1 and L2):

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Inducto Coils Self Inductance

  1. \(\frac{1}{10}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{100}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{1000}\)
  4. 1

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{100}\)

Question 29. A conducting wire frame is placed in a magnetic field which is directed into the paper. The magnetic field is increasing at a constant rate. The directions of induced currents in wires AB and CD are:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Condcuting Wire Frame Is placed In A Magnetic Field

  1. B to A and D to C
  2. A to B and C to D
  3. A to B and D to C
  4. B to A and C to D

Answer: 1. B to A and D to C

Question 30. The frequency of oscillation of current in the inductor is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Frequency Of Oscillation Of Current In The Inductor

  1. \(\frac{1}{3 \sqrt{\mathrm{LC}}}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{6 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{LC}}}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{6 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

Question 31. A short-circuited coil is placed in a time-varying magnetic field. Electrical power is dissipated due to the current induced in the coil. If the number of turns were to be four times and the wire radius halved keeping the radius of the loop unchanged, the electrical power dissipated would be:

  1. Halved
  2. The same
  3. Doubled
  4. Quadrupled

Answer: 2. The same

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Exercise 3 Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Question 1. A rectangular, a square, a circular, and an elliptical loop, all in the (x-y) plane, are moving out of a uniform magnetic field with a constant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=v \hat{i}\). The magnetic field is directed along the negative z-axis direction. The induced emf, during the passage of these loops, out of the field region, will not remain constant for

  1. The rectangular, circular, and elliptical loops
  2. The circular and the elliptical loops
  3. Only the elliptical loop
  4. Any of the four loops

Answer: 2. The circular and the elliptical loops

Question 2. A condenser of capacity C is charged to a potential difference of V1. The plates of the condenser are then connected to an ideal inductor of inductance L. The current through the inductor when the potential difference across the condenser reduces to V2 is

  1. \(\left(\frac{C\left(V_1-V_2\right)^2}{L}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{C}\left(\mathrm{V}_1^2-V_2^2\right)}{L}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{C}\left(\mathrm{V}_1^2+\mathrm{V}_2^2\right)}{\mathrm{L}}\)
  4. \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{C}\left(\mathrm{V}_1^2-\mathrm{V}_2^2\right)}{\mathrm{L}}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\)

Answer: 4. \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{C}\left(\mathrm{V}_1^2-\mathrm{V}_2^2\right)}{\mathrm{L}}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\)

Question 3. The current i in a coil varies with time as shown in the figure. The variation of induced emf with time would be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Current I In A Coil Varies With Time

Answer: 1

Question 4. A coil of resistance 400Ω is placed in a magnetic field. If the magnetic flux Φ (wb) linked with the coil varies with time t (sec) as Φ = 50t² + 4. The current in the coil at t = 2 sec is:

  1. 0.5A
  2. 0.1 A
  3. 2 A
  4. 1 A

Answer: 1. 0.5A

Question 5. The current (I) in the inductance varies with time according to the plot shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current I In The Inductance Is Varying With Time According To The Plot

Which one of the following is the correct variation of voltage with time in the coil?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Variation Of Volatage With Time In the Coil

Answer: 4

Question 6. In a coil of resistance 10 Ω, the induced current developed by changing magnetic flux through it, is shown in the figure as a function of time. The magnitude of change in flux through the coil in Weber is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnitude Of Change In Flux Through The Coil Is Webner

  1. 8
  2. 2
  3. 6
  4. 4

Answer: 2. 2

Question 7. A wire loop is rotated in a magnetic field. The

  1. Twice per revolution
  2. Four times per revolution
  3. Six times per revolution
  4. Once per revolution

Answer: 1. Twice per revolution

Question 8. A thin semicircular conducting ring (PQR) of radius ‘r’ is falling with its plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic field B, as shown in the figure. The potential difference developed across the ring when its speed is v is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Thin Semicircular Conducting Ring Of radiu

  1. Zero
  2. Bvπr²/2 and P is at higher potential
  3. πrBv and R is at higher potential
  4. 2rBv and R have a higher potential

Answer: 4. 2rBv and R is at higher potential

Question 9. A transformer having an efficiency of 90% is working on 200 V and 3 kW power supply. If the current in the secondary coil is 6 A the voltage across the secondary coil and the current in the primary coil respectively are:

  1. 300 V, 15 A
  2. 450 V, 15 A
  3. 450 V, 13.5 A
  4. 600 V, 15A

Answer: 2. 450 V, 15 A

Question 10. A conducting square frame of side ‘a’ and a long straight wire carrying current I are located in the same plane as shown in the figure. The frame moves to the right with a constant velocity ‘V’. The emf induced in the frame will be proportional to:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Conducting Sqaure Frame Of Side And A Long Staright Wire

  1. \(\frac{1}{(2 x-a)^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{(2 x+a)^2}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{(2 x-a)(2 x+a)}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{x^2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{(2 x-a)(2 x+a)}\)

Question 11. A bar magnet is hung by a thin cotton thread in a uniform horizontal magnetic field and is in an equilibrium state. The energy required to rotate it by 60º is W. Now the torque required to keep the magnet in this new position is:

  1. \(\frac{2 W}{\sqrt{3}}\)
  2. \(\frac{W}{\sqrt{3}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{3} \mathrm{~W}\)
  4. \(\frac{\sqrt{3} W}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{3} \mathrm{~W}\)

Question 12. A uniform magnetic field is restricted within a region of radius r. The magnetic field changes with time at a rate \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\). Loop 1 of radius R > r encloses the region r and loop 2 of radius R is outside the region of the magnetic field as shown in the figure below. Then the e.m.f. generated is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Uniform Magnetic Field is Restriced Within A Region Of radius

  1. –\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}} \pi \mathrm{r}^2\) in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
  2. zero in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
  3. –\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}} \pi \mathrm{r}^2\) in loop 1 and –\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}} \pi \mathrm{r}^2\) in loop 2
  4. –\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}} \pi \mathrm{R}^2\)in loop 1 and zero in loop 2

Answer: 1. –\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}} \pi \mathrm{r}^2\) in loop 1 and zero in loop 2

Question 13. The figure shows a circuit that contains three identical resistors with resistance R = 9.0 Ω each, two identical inductors with inductance L = 2.0 mH each and an ideal battery with emf ε = 18 V. The current ‘i’ through the battery just after the switch closed is.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Three Identical Resistors

  1. 2 mA
  2. 0.2 A
  3. 2 A
  4. 4 ampere

Answer: 4. 4 ampere

Question 14. A long solenoid of diameter 0.1 m has 2 × 104 turns per meter. At the center of the solenoid, a coil of 100 turns and a radius of 0.01 m is placed with its axis coinciding with the solenoid axis. The current in the solenoid reduces at a constant rate to 0A from 4A in 0.05 s. If the resistance of the coil is 10π²2Ω, the total charge flowing through the coil during this time is:

  1. 32 πμC
  2. 16 μC
  3. 32 μC
  4. 16 πμC

Answer: 3. 32 πμC

Question 15. The magnetic potential energy stored in a certain inductor is 25 mJ then the current in the inductor is 60 mA. This inductor is of inductance

  1. 0.138 H
  2. 13.89 H
  3. 1.389 H
  4. 138.88 H

Answer: 2. 13.89 H

Question 16. In which of the following devices, the eddy current effect is not used?

  1. Electric heater
  2. Induction furnace
  3. Magnetic braking in train
  4. Electromagnet

Answer: 1. Electric heater

Question 17. An 800-turn coil of effective area 0.05 m² is kept perpendicular to a magnetic field 5×10-5 T. When the plane of the coil is rotated by 90° around any of its coplanar axes in 0.1 s, the emf induced in the coil will be:

  1. 0.02 V
  2. 2 V
  3. 0.2 V
  4. 2×10-3 V

Answer: 1. 0.02 V

Question 18. A cycle wheel of radius 0.5 m is rotated with a constant angular velocity of 10 rad/s in a region of magnetic field of 0.1 T which is perpendicular to the plane of the wheel. The EMF generated between its center and the rim is,

  1. 0.25 V
  2. 0.125 V
  3. 0.5 V
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 0.125 V

Question 19. The magnetic flux linked with a coil (in Wb) is given by the equation Φ = 5t¹ + 3t + 16. The magnitude of induced emf in the coil at the fourth second will be

  1. 33 V
  2. 43 V
  3. 108 V
  4. 10 V

Answer: 2. 43 V

Question 20. A light bulb and an inductor coil are connected to an ac source through a key as shown in the figure below. The key is closed and after some time an iron rod is inserted into the interior of the inductor. The glow of the light bulb

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Glow Og The light Bulb Decreases

  1. Decreases
  2. Remains unchanged
  3. Will fluctuate
  4. Increases

Answer: 1. Decreases

Question 21. A wheel with 20 metallic spokes each 1 m long is rotated with a speed of 120 rpm in a plane perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.4 G. The induced emf between the axle and rim of the wheel will be, (1 G = 10-4 T)

  1. 2.51 x 10-4 V
  2. 2.51 x 10-5 V
  3. 4.0 x 10-5 V
  4. 2.51 V

Answer: 1. 2.51 x 10-4 V

Question 22. Two conducting circular loops of radii R1 and R2 are placed in the same plane with their centers coinciding. If R1 >> R2, the mutual inductance M between them will be directly proportional to

  1. \(\frac{R_2}{R_1}\)
  2. \(\frac{R_1^2}{R_2}\)
  3. \(\frac{R_2^2}{R_1}\)
  4. \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{R_2^2}{R_1}\)

NEET Physics Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 6 Question Bank

Question 23. An inductor of inductance L = 400 mH and resistors of resistances R1 = 2Ω and R2 = 2Ω are connected to a battery of emf 12 V as shown in the figure. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. The switch S is closed at t = 0. The potential drop across L as a function of time is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Potential Drop Across L As A Function Of Time

  1. \(\frac{12}{t} e^{-3 t} V\)
  2. \(6\left(1-e^{-t / 0.2}\right) V\)
  3. \(12 e^{-5 t} \mathrm{~V}\)
  4. \(6 e^{-5 t} V\)

Answer: 3. \(12 e^{-5 t} \mathrm{~V}\)

Question 24. In the circuit shown below, the key K is closed at t = 0. The current through the battery is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Throught The battery

  1. \(\frac{V R_1 R_2}{\sqrt{R_1^2+R_2^2}}\) at t=0 and \(\frac{V}{R_2}\) at \(t=\infty\)
  2. \(\frac{V}{R_2}\) at t=0 and \(\frac{V\left(R_1+R_2\right)}{R_1 R_2}\) at \(t=\infty\)
  3. \(\frac{V}{R_2}\) at t=0 and \(\frac{V R_1 R_2}{\sqrt{R_1^2+R_2^2}}\) at \(t=\infty\)
  4. \(\frac{V\left(R_1+R_2\right)}{R_1 R_2}\) at t=0 and \(\frac{V}{R_2}\) at \(t=\infty\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{V}{R_2}\) at t=0 and \(\frac{V\left(R_1+R_2\right)}{R_1 R_2}\) at \(t=\infty\)

Question 25. In a series LCR circuit R = 200 Q and the voltage and the frequency of the main supply are 220 V and 50 Hz respectively. On taking out the capacitance from the circuit the current lags behind the voltage by 30°. On taking out the inductor from the circuit the current leads the voltage by 30°. The power dissipated in the LCR circuit is

  1. 305 W
  2. 210 W
  3. Zero W
  4. 242 W

Answer: 4. 242 W

Question 26. A fully charged capacitor C with initial charge q0 is connected to a coil of self-inductance L at t = 0. The time at which the energy is stored equally between the electric and the magnetic fields is:

  1. \(\pi \sqrt{L C}\)
  2. \(\frac{\pi}{4} \sqrt{\text { LC }}\)
  3. \(2 \pi \sqrt{L C}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{L C}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\pi}{4} \sqrt{\text { LC }}\)

Question 27. A boat is moving due east in a region where the earth’s magnetic field is 5.0 x 10-5 NA-1 m-1 due north and horizontal. The boat carries a vertical aerial 2m long. If the speed of the boat is 1.50 ms-1, the magnitude of the induced emf in the wire of the aerial is:

  1. 1 mV
  2. 0.75 mV
  3. 0.50 mV
  4. 0.15 mV

Answer: 4. 0.15 mV

Question 28. A horizontal straight wire 20 m long extending from east to west falling with a speed of 5.0 M\s, at right angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field 0.30 x 10-4 Wb \ m2. The instantaneous Value of the e.m. f. induced in the wire will be :

  1. 3 mV
  2. 4.5 mV
  3. 1.5 mV
  4. 6.0 mV

Answer: 1. 3 mV

Question 29. A coil is suspended in a uniform magnetic field, with the plane of the coil parallel to the magnetic lines of force. When a current is passed through the coil it starts oscillating; it is very difficult to stop. But if an aluminum plate is placed near to the coil, it stops. This is due to:

  1. Development of air current when the plate is placed.
  2. Induction of electrical charge on the plate
  3. Shielding of magnetic lines of force as aluminum is a paramagnetic material.
  4. Electromagnetic induction in the aluminum plate gives rise to electromagnetic damping.

Answer: 4. Electromagnetic induction in the aluminum plate gives rise to electromagnetic damping.

Question 30. A metallic rod of length ‘l’ is tied to a string of length 2l and made to rotate with angular speed ω on a horizontal table with one end of the string fixed. If there is a vertical magnetic field ‘B’ in the region, the e.m.f. induced across the ends of the rod is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Metallic Rod Of Length Is Tied Ro A String

  1. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~B} \omega \mathrm{l}^2}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\left.3 B \omega\right|^2}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{4 B \omega l^2}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{5 B \omega l^2}{2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{5 B \omega l^2}{2}\)

Question 31. A circular loop of radius 0.3 cm lies parallel to a much bigger circular loop of radius 20 cm. The center of the small loop is on the axis of the bigger loop. The distance between their centers is 15 cm. If a current of 2.0 A flows through the smaller loop, then the flux linked with the bigger loop is:

  1. 9.1 x 10-11 weber
  2. 6 x 10-11 weber
  3. 3.3 x 10-11 Weber
  4. 6.6 x 10-9 Weber

Answer: 1. 9.1 x 10-11 weber

Question 32. In the circuit shown here, the point ‘C’ is kept connected to point ‘A’ till the current flowing through the circuit becomes constant. Afterward, suddenly point ‘C’ is disconnected from point ‘A’ and connected to point ‘B’ at time t = 0. The ratio of the voltage across resistance and the inductor at t = L/R will be equal to:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Ratio Of The Voltage Across Resistance And The Inductor

  1. \(\frac{e}{1-e}\)
  2. 1
  3. -1
  4. \(\frac{1-e}{e}\)

Answer: 3. -1

Question 33. An inductor (L = 0.03H) and a resistor (R = 0.15 kΩ) are connected in series to a battery of 15V EMF in a circuit shown below. The key K1 has been kept closed for a long time. Then at t = 0, K1 is opened and key K2 is closed simultaneously. At t = 1ms, the current in the circuit will be: (e5 ≅150)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction An Inductor And A Resistor Are Connected In Seried Of A Battery

  1. 100 mA
  2. 67 mA
  3. 6.7 mA
  4. 0.67 mA

Answer: 4. 0.67 mA

Question 34. In a coil resistance of 100Ω, a current is induced by changing the magnetic flux through it as shown in the figure. The magnitude of change in flux through the coil is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Coil Resistance A Current Is Induced By Changing The Magnetic Flux

  1. 275 Wb
  2. 200 Wb
  3. 225 Wb
  4. 250 Wb

Answer: 4. 250 Wb

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 MCQ Practice on Electromagnetic Induction

Question 35. A conducting circular loop made of a thin wire has an area of 3.5 x 10-3 m2 and a resistance of 10Ω. It is perpendicular to a time-dependent magnetic field B(t) = (0.4T)sin(50πt). The field is uniform in Then the net charge flowing through the loop during t = 0 s and t = 10 ms is close to:

  1. 7 mC
  2. 14 mC
  3. 21 mC
  4. 6 mC

Answer: 3. 21 mC

Question 36. A solid metal cube of edge length 2 cm is moving in a positive y-direction at a constant speed of 6 m/s. There is a uniform magnetic field of 0.1 T in the positive z-direction. The potential difference between the two faces of the cube perpendicular to the x-axis is:

  1. 6 mV
  2. 2 mV
  3. 12 mV
  4. 1 mV

Answer: 4. 1 mV

Question 37. The self-induced emf of a coil is 25 volts. When the current in it is changed at a uniform rate from 10A to 25A in 1s, the change in the energy of the inductance is:

  1. 540 J
  2. 740 J
  3. 637.5 J
  4. 437.5 J

Answer: 1. 540 J

Question 38. A copper wire is wound on a wooden frame, whose shape is that of each side of the frame is increased by a factor of 3, keeping the number of turns of the coil per unit length of the frame the same, then the self-inductance of the coil:

  1. Increases by a factor of 3
  2. Decreases by a factor of 9√3
  3. Increases by a factor of 27
  4. Decreases by a factor of 9

Answer: 1. Increases by a factor of 3

Question 39. The region between y = 0 and y = d contains a magnetic field \(\vec{B}=B \hat{Z}.\) A particle of mass m and charge q enters the region from point (0, d) with a velocity \(\vec{v}=v \hat{i}\). If \(d=\frac{m v}{2 q B}\), the acceleration of the charged particle at the point of its emergence at the other side is:

  1. \(\frac{q v B}{m}\left(\frac{1}{2} \hat{i}-\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} \hat{j}\right)\)
  2. \(\frac{q v B}{m}\left(\frac{\hat{i}+\hat{j}}{\sqrt{2}}\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{q v B}{m}\left(\frac{-\hat{j}+\hat{i}}{\sqrt{2}}\right)\)
  4. \(\frac{q v B}{m}\left(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+\frac{1}{2} \hat{\mathrm{j}}\right)\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{q v B}{m}\left(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+\frac{1}{2} \hat{\mathrm{j}}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 MCQ Practice on Electromagnetic Induction

Question 40. In an experiment, electrons are accelerated, from rest, by applying a voltage of 500 V. Calculate the radius of the path if a magnetic field of 100 mT is then applied. [Charge of the electron = 1.6 x 10-19 C Mass of the electron = 9.1 x 10-31 kg]

  1. 7.5 x 10-2 m
  2. 7.5 m
  3. 7.5 x 10-4 m
  4. 7.5 x 10-3 m

Answer: 3. 7.5 x 10-4 m

Question 41. There are two long co-axial solenoids of the same length l. The inner and outer coils have radii r1 and r2 and number of turns per unit length n1 and n2, respectively. The ratio of mutual inductance to the self¬inductance of the inner coil is:

  1. \(\frac{n_2}{n_1} \cdot \frac{r_2^2}{r_1^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{n_2}{n_1}\)
  3. \(\frac{n_1}{n_2}\)
  4. \(\frac{n_2}{n_1} \cdot \frac{r_1}{r_2}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{n_2}{n_1}\)

Question 42. A 10 m long horizontal wire extends from North East to South West. It is falling with a speed of 5.0 ms-1, at right angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field, of 0.3 x 10-4 Wb/m². The value of the induced emf in the wire is:

  1. 1.1 x 10-3 V
  2. 2.5 x 10-3 V
  3. 0.3 x 10-3 V
  4. 1.5 x 10-3V

Answer: 1. 1.1 x 10-3 V

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes For Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics

Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Introduction:

Blue lakes, ochre deserts, green forests, and multicolored rainbows can be enjoyed by anyone who has eyes with which to see them. But by studying the branch of physics called optics, which deals with the behavior of light and other electromagnetic waves, we can reach a deeper appreciation of the visible world.

A knowledge of the properties of light allows us to understand the blue color of the sky and the design of optical devices such as telescopes, microscopes, cameras, eyeglasses, and the human eye.

The same basic principles of optics also lie at the heart of modern developments such as the laser, optical fibers, holograms, optical computers, and new techniques in medical imaging.

1. Condition For Rectilinear Propagation Of Light

Some parts of the optics can be understood if we assume that light travels in a straight line and bends abruptly when it suffers reflection or refraction.

The assumption that the light travels in a straight line is correct if

  1. The medium is isotropic, i.e. its behavior is the same in all directions and
  2. The obstacle past which the light moves or the opening through which the light moves is not very small.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Condition For Rectilinar Propagation Of Light

Geometrical Optics NEET Physics Class 12 Study Notes

Consider a slit of width ‘a’ through which monochromatic light rays pass and strike a screen, placed at a distance D as shown.

It is found that the light strikes in a band of width ‘b’ more than ‘a’. This bending is called diffraction.

Light bends by (b-a)/2 on each side of the central line. It can be shown by the wave theory of light that \(\sin \theta=\frac{\lambda}{\mathrm{a}} \ldots \ldots. (\mathrm{A})\).

where θ is shown in the figure.

This formula indicates that the bending is considerable only when a ≅ λ. Diffraction is more pronounced in sound because its wavelength is much more than that of light and it is of the order of the size of obstacles or apertures.

Formula (A) gives \(\frac{\mathrm{b}-\mathrm{a}}{2 \mathrm{D}} \approx \frac{\lambda}{\mathrm{a}}\)

It is clear that the bending is negligible if \(\frac{D \lambda}{a} \ll a \text { or } a \gg \sqrt{D \lambda}\).

If this condition is fulfilled, light is said to move rectilinearly. In most of the situations including geometrical optics, the conditions are such that we can safely assume that light moves in a straight line and bends only when it gets reflected or refracted.

∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{b}-\mathrm{a}}{2 \mathrm{D}} \approx \frac{\lambda}{\mathrm{a}}\)

Thus geometrical optics is an approximate treatment in which the light waves can be represented by straight lines which are called rays.

A ray of light is the straight line path of transfer of light energy. The arrow represents the direction of propagation of light.

The figure shows a ray which indicates light is moving from A to B.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ray Indicates Light Is Moving From A To B

2. Properties Of Light

The speed of light in a vacuum, denoted by c, is equal to 3 x 108 m/s approximately.

Light is an electromagnetic wave (proposed by Maxwell). It consists of varying electric fields and magnetic fields.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Is Electromagnetic Wave

Light carries energy and momentum.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Electromagnetic Spectrum

The formula v = fλ is applicable to light.

When the light gets reflected in the same medium, it suffers no change in frequency, speed, and wavelength.

The frequency of light remains unchanged when it gets reflected or refracted.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Frequency Of Light Remains Unchanged

3. Reflection Of Light

When light rays strike the boundary of two media such as air and glass, a part of light is turned back into the same medium. This is called the Reflection of Light.

Regular Reflection:

When the reflection takes place from a perfect plane surface it is called Regular Reflection. In this case, the reflected light has a large intensity in one direction and a negligibly small intensity in other directions.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Regular Refraction

Diffused Reflection

When the surface is rough, we do not get a regular behavior of light.

Although at each point light rays get reflected irrespective of the overall nature of the surface, the difference is observed because even in a narrow beam of light many rays are reflected from different points of the surface and it is quite possible that these rays may move in different directions due to irregularity of the surface. This process enables us to see an object from any position.

Such a reflection is called a diffused reflection.

For example reflection from a wall, from a newspaper, etc. This is why you can not see your face in the newspaper and in the wall.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Diifused Reflection

3.1 Laws Of Reflection

The incident ray, the reflected ray, and the normal at the point of incidence lie in the same plane. This plane is called the plane of incidence (or plane of reflection).

This condition can be expressed mathematically as \(R.\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{N}})=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{N}} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}})=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{N}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}})=0 \text { where } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}, \overrightarrow{\mathrm{N}} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) ≠ vectors of any magnitude along incident ray, the normal and the reflected ray respectively.

The angle of incidence (the angle between the normal and the incident ray) and the angle of reflection (the angle between the reflected ray and the normal) are equal, i.e.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Laws Of Reflection

Special Cases:

Normal Incidence: In case the light is incident normally, i = r = 0

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Is Incident Normally

Note: We say that the ray has retraced its path.

Grazing Incidence: In case light strikes the reflecting surface tangentially, i = r = 90 8 = 0° or 360°

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Strickes The Reflction Surface Tangentially

Note: In the case of reflection, the speed (magnitude of velocity) of light remains unchanged but in Grazing incidence velocity remains unchanged.

Example: Show that for a light ray incident at an angle ‘i’ on getting reflected the angle of deviation is δ = π – 2i or π + 2i.

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Ray Incident At And Angle On getting Reflected The Angle Of Derivation

From Figure (2) It is clear that light rays bend either by δ1 anticlockwise or by δ2 (= 2π – δ1) clockwise.

From Figure (1) δ1 = π – 2i.

∴ δ1 = π + 2i .

Class 12 NEET Geometrical Optics Notes

3.2 Object And Image

(1)Object (O): Object is defined as a point of intersection of incident rays.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Object Is Defined As Point Of Intersection Of Incidet Rays

Let us call the side in which incident rays are present the incident side and the side in which reflected (refracted) rays are present, the reflected (refracted) side.

Note: An object is called real if it lies on the incident side otherwise it is called virtual.

(2) Image (I): Image is defined as a point of intersection of reflected rays (in case of reflection) or refracted rays (in case of refraction).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Is Defined As Point Of Intersection Of Reflected Rays

Note: An image is called real if it lies on the reflected or refracted side otherwise it is called virtual.

4. Plane Mirror

A plane mirror is formed by polishing one surface of a plane thin glass plate. It is also said to be silvered on one side.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Plane Mirror

A beam of parallel rays of light, incident on a plane mirror will get reflected as a beam of parallel reflected rays.

Example: For a fixed incident light ray, if the mirror is rotated through an angle θ (about an axis which lies in the plane of mirror and perpendicular to the plane of incidence), show that the reflected ray turns through an angle 2θ in the same sense.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Fixed Incident Light Ray

Solution:

M1, N1, and R1 indicate the initial position of the mirror, the initial normal, and the initial direction of the reflected light rays respectively. M2, N2, and R2 indicate the final position of the mirror, the final normal, and the final direction of reflected light rays respectively. From the figure, it is clear that ABC = 2Φ + δ = 2(Φ + θ) or δ = 2θ.

Note: Keeping the mirror fixed if the incident ray is rotated by an angle θ then the reflected ray rotates by the same angle in the opposite direction of rotation.

4.1 Point object: Characteristics Of Image Due To Reflection By A Plane Mirror

  1. Distance of object from mirror = Distance of image from the mirror.
  2. All the incident rays from a point object will meet at a single point after reflection from a plane mirror which is called an image.
  3. The line joining a point object and its image is normal to the reflecting surface.
  4. For a real object, the image is virtual and for a virtual object the image is real
  5. The region in which the observer’s eye must be present in order to view the image is called the field of view.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Reflection By A Plane Mirror

Example: Shows a point object A and a plane mirror MN. Find the position of the image of object A, in mirror MN, by drawing a ray diagram. Indicate the region in which the observer’s eye must be present in order to view the image. (This region is called the field of view).

Solution:

Consider any two rays emanating from the object. N1 and N2 are normals; i1 = r1 and i2 = r2

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Field Of View

The meeting point of reflected rays R1 and R2 is image A’. Though only two rays are considered it must be understood that all rays from A reflect from the mirror such that their meeting point is A’.

To obtain the region in which reflected rays are present, join A’ with the ends of the mirror and extend. The following figure shows this region as shaded.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Meeting Point Of Reflected rays

In the figure there are no reflected rays beyond the rays 1 and 2, therefore the observers P and Q cannot see the image because they do not receive any reflected rays.

4.2 Extended Object:

An extended object like AB shown in the figure is a combination of an infinite number of point objects from A to B. Image of every point object will be formed individually and thus infinite images will be formed.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Extended Object

A’ will be an image of A, C’ will be an image of C, B’ will be an image of B, etc. All point images together form an extended image. Thus, an extended image is formed of an extended object.

Properties Of Image Of An Extended Object, Formed By A Plane Mirror:

1. Size of extended object = size of the extended image.

2. The image is erect if the extended object is placed parallel to the mirror.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Is Erect If The Extebded Object Is Placed Parallel To The Mirror

3. The image is inverted if the extended object lies perpendicular to the plane mirror.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Is Inverted If The Extended Object Lies Perpendicular To The Plane Mirror

If an extended horizontal object is placed in front of a mirror inclined 45° with the horizontal, the image formed will be vertical.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Extended Horizontal Object Is Placed Infront Of A Mirror

Example: Show that the minimum size of a plane mirror, required to see the full image of an observer is half the size of that observer.

Solution:

It is self-explanatory if you consider lengths ‘x’ and ‘y’ as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Of An Observer Is Half The Size Of That Observer

Aliter: ΔE M1, M2, and ΔE H’F’ are similar

∴ \(\frac{M_1 M_2}{H^{\prime} F^{\prime}}=\frac{z}{2 z} \text { or } \quad M_1 M_2=H^{\prime} F^{\prime} / 2=H F / 2\)

4.3 Relation Between Velocity Of Object And Image: From mirror property: Xim = – Xom, yim = yom and zim = zom

Here xim means the ‘x’ coordinate of the image with respect to the mirror. Similarly, others have meaning.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Relation Between Velocity Of Object And Image

Differentiating w.r.t time, we get \(\mathrm{v}_{(\mathrm{im}) \mathrm{x}}=-\mathrm{v}_{(\mathrm{om}) \mathrm{x}} ; \quad \mathrm{v}_{(\mathrm{im}) \mathrm{y}}=\mathrm{v}_{(\mathrm{om}) \mathrm{y}} ; \quad \mathrm{v}_{(\mathrm{im}) \mathrm{z}}=\mathrm{v}_{(\mathrm{om}) \mathrm{z}} \text {, }\)

⇒ for \(x \text { axis } \quad v_{i G}-v_{m G}=-\left(v_{o G}-v_{m G}\right)\)

but for y-axis and z-axis \(v_{i G}-v_{m G}=\left(v_{O G}-v_{m G}\right) \text { or } \quad v_{i G}=v_{O G}\)

here: ViG = Velocity of the image with respect to ground.

4.3 Relation Between Velocity Of Object And Image Solved Examples

Example 1. An object moves with 5 m/s towards the right while the mirror moves with 1m/s towards the left as shown. Find the velocity of the image.

Solution: Take → as + direction.

vi – vm = vm – v0

vi – (-1) = (-1) – 5

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Velocity Of The Image

vi = – 7m/s.

7 m/s and direction towards the left.

Example 2. There is a point object and a plane mirror. If the mirror is moved by 10 cm away from the object find the distance at which the image will move.

Solution:

We know that \(x_{i m}=-x_{o m}\) or \(x_i-x_m=x_m-x_0\) or \(\Delta x_1-\Delta x_m=\Delta x_m-\Delta x_0\).

In this Q. \(\Delta x_o=0 ; \Delta x_m=10 \mathrm{~cm}\).

Therefore \(\Delta x_1=2 \Delta x_m-\Delta x_o=20 \mathrm{~cm}\).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Final Position Of Mirror

NEET Physics Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Summary

4.4 Images Formed By Two Plane Mirrors:

If rays after getting reflected from one mirror strike the second mirror, the image formed by first mirror will function as an object for the second mirror, and this process will continue for every successive reflection.

4.4 Images Formed By Two Plane Mirrors Solved Examples

Example 1. The figure shows a point object placed between two parallel mirrors. Its distance from M1 is 2 cm and that from M2 is 8 cm. Find the distance of images from the two mirrors considering reflection on mirror M1 first.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Point Object Placed Between Two Parallel Mirrors

Solution:

To understand how images are formed see the following figure and table. You will be required to know what symbols like I121 stand for. See the following diagram.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Distance Of Images From Two Mirrors

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Require To Symbol

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Incident Rays

Similarly, images will be formed by the rays striking mirror M2 first. Total number of images = ∞

Example 2. Consider two perpendicular mirrors. M1 and M2 and a point object O. Taking the origin at the point of intersection of the mirrors and the coordinate of the object as (x, y), find the position and number of images.

Solution:

Rays ‘a’ and ‘b’ strike mirror M, only and these rays will form image I1 at (x1 -y), such that O and I1 are equidistant from mirror M1. These rays do not form further images because they do not strike any mirror again.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Two Perpendicular Mirrors

Similarly, rays ‘d’ and ‘e’ strike mirror M2 only and these rays will form image l2 at (-x, y), such that O and l2 are equidistant from mirror M2.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Equidistant From Mirroe

Now consider those rays which strike mirror M2 first and then the mirror M1

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Rays Which Strikes Mirrors

For incident ray 1,2 the object is O, and reflected rays 3, and 4 form image l2.

Now rays 3, and 4 incident on M1 (object is l2) which reflect as rays 5, and 6 and form image I21. Rays 5, and 6 do not strike any mirror, so image formation stops.

I2 and I21, are equidistant from M1. To summarize see the following figure

For rays reflecting first from M1 and then from M2, the first image I1 (at (x1 -y)) will be formed and this will function as an object for mirror M2 and then its image I12 (at (-x, -y)) will be formed.

I12 and I21 coincide.

∴ A total of three images are formed

4.5 Locating All The Images Formed By Two Plane Mirrors

Consider two plane mirrors M1 and M2 inclined at an angle θ = α+β as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Locating All The Images Formed By Two Plane Mirrors

Point P is an object kept such that it makes angle α with mirror M1 and angle β with mirror M2. The image of object P formed by M1, denoted by I1, will be inclined by angle α on the other side of mirror M1. This angle is written in brackets in the figure beside I1.

Similarly, the image of object P formed by M2, denoted by I2, will be inclined by angle β on the other side of mirror M2. This angle is written in brackets in the figure beside I2.

Now I2 will act as an object for M1 which is at an angle (α+2β) from M1. Its image will be formed at an angle (α+2β) on the opposite side of M1. This image will be denoted as I21, and so on. Think when this process will stop.

Hint: The virtual image formed by a plane mirror must not be in front of the mirror or its extension.

Number Of Images Formed By Two Inclined Mirrors

(1) If \(\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta}=\) even number; number of image \(=\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta}-1\)

(2) If \(\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta}=\) odd number; the number of images \(=\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta}-1\), if the object is placed on the angle bisector.

(3) If \(\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta}=\) odd number; the number of images \(=\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta}\), if the object is not placed on the angle bisector.

(4) If \(\frac{360^{\circ}}{\theta} \neq\) integer, then count the number of images as explained above.

Question 1. What should be the angle between two plane mirrors so that whatever the angle of incidence, the incident ray and the reflected ray from the two mirrors be parallel to each other

  1. 60°
  2. 90°
  3. 120°
  4. 175°

Answer: 1. 60°

Question 2. A light bulb is placed between two plane mirrors inclined at an angle of 60°. The number of images formed are

  1. 6
  2. 2
  3. 5
  4. 4

Answer: 2. 2

Question 3. A ray of light incidents on a plane mirror at an angle of 30°. The deviation produced in the ray is

  1. 30°
  2. 60°
  3. 90°
  4. 120°

Answer: 3. 90°

Question 4. A man runs towards the mirror at a speed of 15m/s. What is the speed of his image?

  1. 7.5 m/s
  2. 15 m/s
  3. 30 m/s
  4. 45 m/s

Answer: 4. 15 m/s

5. Spherical Mirrors

A Spherical Mirror is formed by polishing one surface of a part of a sphere. Depending upon which part is shining the spherical mirror is classified as (1) a Concave mirror, if the side towards the center of curvature is shining, and (2) a Convex mirror if the side away from the center of curvature is shining.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Spherical Mirrors

5.1 Important Terms Related With Spherical Mirrors:

A spherical shell with the center of curvature, pole aperture, and radius of curvature identified

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Important Terms Related With Spherical Mirrors

Geometrical Optics NEET Physics Chapter 7 Key Concepts

  1. Center of Curvature (C): The center of the sphere from which the spherical mirror is formed is called the Center of curvature of the mirror. It is represented by C and is indicated in the figure.
  2. Pole (P): The center of the mirror is called the Pole. It is represented by the point P on the mirror APB in the figure.
  3. Principal Axis: The Principal Axis is a line that is perpendicular to the plane of the mirror and passes through the pole. The Principal Axis can also be defined as the line that joins the Pole to the Center of Curvature of the mirror.
  4. Aperture (A): The aperture is the segment or area of the mirror which is available for reflecting light. In figure. APB is the aperture of the mirror.
  5. Principle focus (F): It is the point of intersection of all the reflected rays for which the incident rays strike the mirror (with a small aperture) parallel to the principal axis. In the concave mirror it is real and in the convex mirror it is virtual. The distance from pole to focus is called focal length.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Concave Mirrors

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Convex Mirror

5.1 Important Terms Related With Spherical Mirrors Solved Examples

Example 1. Find the angle of incidence of the ray for which it passes through the pole, given that MI || CP.

Solution:

∠MIC = ∠CIP = θ

MI || CP ∠MIC = ∠ICP = θ

CI = CP

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Of Incidence Of Ray Which Passes Through The Pole

∠CIP = ∠CPI = θ

∴ In ΔCIP all angles are equal 3θ = 180°

⇒ θ = 60°

Example 2. Find the distance CQ if the incident light ray parallel to the principal axis is incident at an angle i. Also, find the distance CQ if i → 0.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Incident Light Ray Parallel To Principal Axis Is Incident At An Angle

Solution:

⇒ \(\cos \mathrm{i}=\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2 \mathrm{CQ}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{CQ}=\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2 \cos \mathrm{i}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Distance Equal From Center Of Curvature Is Called Focus

So, paraxial rays meet at a distance equal to R / 2 from the center of curvature, which is called the focus.

6. Ray tracing

6.1 Ray tracing: The following facts are useful in ray tracing.

1. If the incident ray is parallel to the principal axis, the reflected ray passes through the focus.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ray Tracing

2. If the incident ray passes through the focus, then the reflected ray is parallel to the principal axis.

3. An incident ray passing through the center of curvature will be reflected back through the center of curvature (because it is a normal incident ray).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Incident Ray Passes Through The Foucs

4. It is easy to make the ray tracing of a ray incident at the pole as shown below.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ray Tracing Of A Ray Incident At The Pole

6.2 Sign Convention

We are using the coordinate sign convention.

Take origin at the pole (in case of the mirror) or at the optical center (in case of the lens)

Take the X axis along the principal axis, taking a positive direction along the incident light. u, v, R, and f indicate the x coordinate of the object, image, center of curvature, and focus respectively.

y-coordinate is taken positive above Principle Axis and negative below Principle Axis’ h1 and h2 denote the y coordinate of object and image respectively.

Note: This sign convention is used for reflection from mirror, and refraction through flat or curved surfaces or lenses.

6.3 Formulae For Reflection From Spherical Mirrors:

Mirror formula: \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{2}{R}-\frac{1}{f}\)

The x-coordinate of the center of the Curvature and the focus of the Concave mirror are negative and those for the Convex mirror are positive. In the case of mirrors since light rays reflect back in the X-direction, therefore -ve sign of v indicates the real image and the +ve sign of v indicates the virtual image.

6.3 Formulae For Reflection From Spherical Mirrors Solved Examples

Example 1. The figure shows a spherical concave mirror with its pole at (0, 0) and principle axis along the x-axis. There is a point object at (–40 cm, 1cm), find the position of the image.

Solution:

According to sign convention, u = –40 cm

h1 = +1 cm

f = – 5 cm.

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{-40}=\frac{1}{-5} ; v=\frac{-40}{7} \mathrm{~cm} . ; \frac{h_2}{h_1}=\frac{-v}{u}\)

⇒ \(h_2=-\frac{-v}{u} \times h_1=\frac{-\left(-\frac{40}{7}\right) \times 1}{-40}=-\frac{1}{7} \mathrm{~cm}\)

∴ The position of image is \(\left(\frac{-40}{7} \mathrm{~cm},-\frac{1}{7} \mathrm{~cm}\right)\)

Example 2. Converging rays are incident on a convex spherical mirror so that their extensions intersect 30 cm behind the mirror on the optical axis. The reflected rays form a diverging beam so that their extensions intersect the optical axis 1.2 m from the mirror. Determine the focal length of the mirror.

Solution:

In this case u = + 30

⇒ v = + 120

∴ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{120}+\frac{1}{30}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Focal Length Of The Mirror

f = 24 cm

Example 3. Find the position of the final image after three successive reflections taking the first reflection on m1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Position Of Final Image After Three Successive Reflections

Solution:

I reflection: Focus of mirror = – 10 cm ⇒ u = – 15 cm

Applying mirror formula: \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}\) v = -30 cm

For 2 Reflection On Plane Mirror: u = – 10 cm .-. v = 10 cm

For 3 Reflection On Curved Mirror Again: u = – 50 cm ; f = – 10 cm

Applying mirror formula: \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\); v = -12.5 cm

Lateral Magnification (or transverse magnification) denoted by m is defined as m = and is related as \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{\mathrm{~h}_1}\).

From the definition of m positive sign of m indicates an erect image and a negative sign indicates an inverted image.

In the case of successive reflection from mirrors, the overall lateral magnification is given by m1 x m2 x m3 ……., where m1, m2, etc. are lateral magnifications produced by individual mirrors.

h1 and h2 denote the y coordinate of the object and image respectively.

Note: Using the following conclusions can be made.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Successive Reflections From Mirrors

we get m = \(\frac{f}{f-u}=\frac{f-v}{f}\)……(just a time saving formula)

Image Formed By The Concave Mirror

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Formed By Concave Mirror

Focal Plane: A plane passing through focus and perpendicular to the principal axis is called the focal plane

Secondary Focus: Paraxial rays that are parallel to each other but not parallel to the principal axis will also meet at a single point in a focal plane after reflection from the spherical mirror (or refraction from the lens). That point is known as secondary focus.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Focal Plane

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Notes: Geometrical Optics

Example 1. An extended object is placed perpendicular to the principle axis of a concave mirror of a radius of curvature 20 cm at a distance of 15 cm from the pole. Find the lateral magnification produced.

Solution:

u = – 15 cm f = – 10 cm

Using \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}\)we get, v = – 30 cm

∴ m = \(-\frac{v}{u}=-2 \text {. }\)

Aliter: \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{f}}{\mathrm{f}-\mathrm{u}}=\frac{-10}{-10-(-15)}=-2\)

Example 2. A person looks into a spherical mirror. The size of the image of his face is twice the actual size of his face. If the face is at a distance of 20 cm then find the nature of the radius of curvature of the mirror.

Solution:

The person will see his face only when the image is virtual. The virtual image of a real object is erect.

Hence m = 2

∴ \(\frac{-v}{u}=2 \quad \Rightarrow \quad v=40 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Applying \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}} ; \mathrm{f}=-40 \mathrm{~cm}\) or \(\mathrm{R}=80 \mathrm{~cm}\).

Aliter: \(m=\frac{f}{f-u} \quad \Rightarrow \quad 2=\frac{f}{f-(-20)}\)

f = \(-40 \mathrm{~cm}\) or \(R=80 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 3. An image of a candle on a screen is found to be double its size. When the candle is shifted by a distance of 5 cm then the image becomes triple its size. Find the nature and ROC of the mirror.

Solution:

Since the images formed on screen, it is real. Real object and real images imply concave mirrors.

Applying \(m=\frac{f}{f-u}\) or \(-2=\frac{f}{f-(u)}\)…….(1)

After shifting \(-3=\frac{f}{f-(u+5)}\)…..(2)

[Why u + 5 ?, why not u – 5: In a concave mirror are size of the real image will increase, only when the real object is brought closer to the mirror. In doing so, its x coordinate will increase]

From (1) and (2) we get, f = – 30 cm or R = 60 cm

Velocity Of Image

(1) Object Moving Perpendicular To Principal Axis: From the relation, we have \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{\mathrm{~h}_1}=-\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}} \text { or } \quad \mathrm{h}_2=-\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}} \cdot \mathrm{h}_1\)

If a point object moves perpendicular to the principle axis, the x coordinate of both the object and the image becomes constant. On differentiating the above relation w.r.t. time , we get, \(\frac{\mathrm{dh}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}} \frac{\mathrm{dh}_1}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Here, \(\frac{\mathrm{dh}_1}{\mathrm{dt}}\) denotes velocity of object perpendicular to the principle axis and \(\frac{\mathrm{dh}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) velocity of image perpendicular to the principle axis.

(2) Object Moving Along Principal Axis: On differentiating the mirror formula with respect to time we get \(\frac{d v}{d t}=-\frac{v^2}{u^2} \frac{d u}{d t}\) is the velocity of the image along Principle axis — and is the velocity of the object along principle axis.

A negative sign implies that the image, in the case of a mirror, always moves in the direction opposite to that of the object. This discussion is for velocity with respect to the mirror and along the x-axis.

(3) Object Moving At An Angle With The Principal Axis: Resolve the velocity of the object along and perpendicular to the principal axis find the velocities of the image in these directions separately and then find the resultant.

(4) Optical Power Of A Mirror (In Diopters) = \(\frac{1}{f}\)

f = focal length with a sign and in meters.

(5) If the object lying along the principle axis is not of very small size, the longitudinal magnification = \(\frac{v_2-v_1}{u_2-u_1}\) (it will always be inverted)

(6)If the size of the object is very small compared to its distance from Pole then

On differentiating the mirror formula we get \(\frac{d v}{d u}=-\frac{v^2}{u^2}\): Mathematically ‘du’ implies a small change in the position of the object and ‘dv’ implies corresponding small change in position of the image.

If a small object lies along the principal axis, du may indicate the size of the object and dv the size of its image along the principal axis (Note that the focus should not lie in between the initial and final points of the object).

In this case \(\frac{d u}{d v}\) is called longitudinal magnification. The negative sign indicates inversion of the image irrespective of the nature of the image and the nature of the mirror.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Nature Of Image And Nature Of Mirror

Example: A point object is placed 60 cm from the pole of a concave mirror of a focal length of 10 cm on the principle axis. Find

  1. The position of the image
  2. If the object is shifted 1 mm towards the mirror along the principle axis find the shift in the image. Explain the result.

Solution:

(1) u = – 60 cm; f = – 10cm

v = \(\frac{f u}{u-f}=\frac{-10(-60)}{-60-(-10)}=\frac{600}{-50}=-12 \mathrm{~cm}\).

(2) \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}\)

Differentiating, we get \(d v=-\frac{v^2}{u^2} d u=-\left(\frac{-12}{-60}\right)^2[1 \mathrm{~mm}]=-\frac{1}{25} \mathrm{~mm}\)

[du = 1mm; sign of du is +ve because it is shifted in +ve direction defined by signconvention.]

-ve sign of dv indicates that the image will shift towards the negative direction.

The sign of v is negative. Which implies the image is formed on the negative side of the pole. (1) and (2) together imply that the image will shift away from the pole.

Note that differentials dv and du denote small changes only.

Newton’s Formula: XY = f²

X and Y are the distances (along the principal axis) of the object and image respectively from the principal focus. This formula can be used when the distances are mentioned or asked from the focus.

In the case of spherical mirrors if object distance (x) and image distance (y) are measured from focus instead of the pole, u = -(f + x) and v = – (f + y), by  \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we can write \(-\frac{1}{(f+y)}-\frac{1}{(f+x)}=-\frac{1}{f}\)

on solving xy = f²

This is Newton’s formula.

Question 1. A diminished virtual image can be formed only in

  1. Plane mirror
  2. A concave mirror
  3. A convex mirror
  4. Concave-parabolic mirror

Answer: 3. A convex mirror

Question 2. An object 5 cm tall is placed 1m from a concave spherical mirror which has a radius of curvature of 20 cm. The size of the image is

  1. 0.11 cm
  2. 0.50 cm
  3. 0.55 cm
  4. 0.60 cm

Answer: 3. 0.55 cm

Question 3. In a concave mirror experiment, an object is placed at a distance x1 from the focus and the image is formed at a distance x2 from the focus. The focal length of the mirror would be

  1. \(x_1 x_2\)
  2. \(\sqrt{x_1 x_2}\)
  3. \(\frac{x_1+x_2}{2}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{x_1}{x_2}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{x_1 x_2}\)

Question 4. Given a point source of light, which of the following can produce a parallel beam of light

  1. Convex mirror
  2. Concave mirror
  3. Concave lens
  4. Two plane mirrors inclined at an angle of 90°

Answer: 2. Concave mirror

7. Refraction Of Light

When the light changes its medium some changes occur in its properties the phenomenon is known as refraction.

If the light is incident at an angle (0 < i < 90) then it deviates from its actual path.

It is due to changes in the speed of light as light passes from one medium to another medium.

If the light is incident normally then it goes to the second medium without bending, but still, it is called refraction.

The refractive index of a medium is defined as the factor by which the speed of light reduces as compared to the speed of light in a vacuum. μ= \(\frac{c}{v}\) = \(\frac{\text{speed of light in vacuum}}{\text{speed of light in medium}}\).

More (less) refractive index implies less (more) speed of light in that medium, which therefore is called a denser (rarer) medium.

7.1 Laws of Refraction

(1) The incident ray, the normal to any refracting surface at the point of incidence, and the refracted ray all lie in the same plane called the plane of incidence or plane of refraction.

(2) \(\frac{sin i}{sin r}\) = Constant for any pair of media and for light of a given wavelength. This is known as Snll’s.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Laws Of Refraction

Also, \(\frac{\text{Sin} i}{\text{Sin} r}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{n}_1}=\frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}\)

For applying in problems remember n1 sini = n2sinr

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{n}_1}={ }_1 \mathrm{n}_2\) = Refractive Index of the second medium with respect to the first medium.

C = speed of light in air (or vacuum) = 3 x 108 m/s.

Special Cases:

(1) Normal incidence: i = 0

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Normal Incidence

From Snell’s law: r = 0

(2) When light moves from denser to rarer medium it bends away from normal.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Moves From Denser To Rarer Medium It Bends Away From Normal

(3) When light moves from rarer to denser medium it bends towards the normal.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Moves From Rarer To Denser Medium It bends Towards The Normal

Note:

(1) The higher the value of R.I., the denser (optically) is the medium.

(2) Frequency of light does not change during refraction.

(3) Refractive index of the medium relative to vacuum = \(\sqrt{\mu_r \epsilon_r}\) \(n_{\text {vaoum}}\)

= \(1 ; n_{\text {atr }}=51; n_{\text {mater }} \text { (average value }=4 / 3 ; n_{\text {glass }} \text { (average value) }=3 / 2\)

7.2 Deviation of a Ray Due to Refraction: Deviation (δ) of ray incident

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Deviation Of A Ray Due To Refraction

at ∠i and refracted at ∠r is given by δ = |i− r|.

Geometrical Optics Notes for NEET Physics

Example 1. A light ray is incident on a glass sphere at an angle of incidence 60° as shown. Find the angles r, r’,e, and the total deviation after two refractions.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Ray Is Incident On A Glass Sphere At Angle Of Incidence

Solution:

Applying Snell’s law 1sin60° = sinr ⇒ r = 30°

From symmetry r’ = √3 r = 30°.

Again applying Snell’s law at the second surface 1sin e = sinr ⇒ e = 60°

Deviation at first surface = i – r = 60° – 30° = 30°

Deviation at second surface = e – r’ = 60° – 30° = 30°

Therefore total deviation = 60°.

Example 2. Find the angle θa made by the light ray when it gets refracted from water to air, as shown figure.

Solution:

Snell’s Law \(\mu_w \sin \theta_w=\mu_a \sin \theta_a ; \frac{4}{3} \times \frac{3}{5}=1 \sin \theta_a ; \sin \theta_a=\frac{4}{5} ; \theta_a=\sin ^{-1} \frac{4}{5}\)

Example 3. Find the speed of light in medium ‘a’ if the speed of light in medium ‘b’ is where c = speed of light in vacuum and light refracts from medium ‘a’ to medium ‘b’ making 45º and 60º respectively with the normal.

Solution:

Snell’s Law \(\mu_{\mathrm{a}} \sin \theta_{\mathrm{a}}=\mu_{\mathrm{b}} \sin \theta_{\mathrm{b}} \quad ; \quad \frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{a}}} \sin \theta_{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{b}}} \sin \theta_{\mathrm{b}}\)

∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{a}}} \sin 45^{\circ}=\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{c} / 3} \sin 60^{\circ} . \quad ; \quad \mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{\sqrt{2} \mathrm{c}}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)

7.3 Principle of Reversibility of Light Rays

  1. A ray traveling along the path of the reflected ray is reflected along the path of the incident ray.
  2. A refracted ray reversed to travel back along its path will get refracted along the path of the incident ray. Thus the incident and refracted rays are mutually reversible.

8. Refraction Through A Parallel Slab

When light passes through a parallel slab, having the same medium on both sides, then

(1) The emergent ray is parallel to the incident ray.

Note: The emergent ray will not be parallel to the incident ray if the medium on both the sides of slab is different.

(2) Light is shifted laterally, given by (student should be able to derive it)

d = \(\frac{t \sin (i-r)}{\cos r}\); t = thickness of slab

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refraction Through A Parallel Slab

Example 1. Find the lateral shift of the light ray while it passes through a parallel glass slab of thickness 10 cm placed in air. The angle of incidence in air is 60° and the angle of refraction in glass is 45°.

Solution:

d = \(\frac{\mathrm{t} \sin (\mathrm{i}-\mathrm{r})}{\cos \mathrm{r}}=\frac{10 \sin \left(60^{\circ}-45^{\circ}\right)}{\cos 45^{\circ}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Lateral Shift Of Light Ray While Passes Through A Parallel Glass Slab Of Thickness

= \(\frac{10 \sin 15^{\circ}}{\cos 45^{\circ}}=10 \sqrt{2} \sin 15^{\circ}\).

8.1 Apparent Depth and Shift of Submerged Object

At near normal incidence (small angle of incidence i) apparent depth (d’) is given by:

d’ = \(\frac{d}{n_{\text {relative }}} \text { and } v^{\prime}=\frac{v}{n_{\text {reltive }}}\)

where \(n_{\text {rolethre }}=\frac{n_i \text { (R.I. of medium of incidence) }}{n_r \text { (R. I. of medium of refraction) }}\)

d = distance of the object from the interface = real depth

d’ = distance of the image from the interface = apparent depth

v = velocity of the object perpendicular to interface relative to the surface.

v´ = velocity of image perpendicular to interface relative to surface.

This formula can be easily derived using Snell’s law and applying the condition of nearly normal incidence…..

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Apparent Depth And Shift Of Submerged Object

Apparent shift = \(\left(1-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{rel}}}\right)\)

Example 1. An object lies 100 cm inside water. It is viewed from the air nearly normally. Find the apparent depth of the object.

Solution:

d’ = \(\frac{d}{n_{\text {relative }}}=\frac{100}{\frac{4 / 3}{1}}=75 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 2.

  1. Find the apparent height of the bird
  2. Find the apparent depth of fish
  3. At what distance will the bird appear to the fish?
  4. At what distance will the fish appear to the bird
  5. If the velocity of the bird is 12 cm/sec downward and the fish is 12 cm/sec in an upward direction, then find out their relative velocities with respect to each other.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Apparent Deapth Of Object

Solution:

  1. \(d_B=\frac{36}{\frac{1}{\left(\frac{4}{3}\right)}}=\frac{36}{3 / 4}=48 \mathrm{~cm}\)
  2. \(d_F=\frac{36}{4 / 3}=27 \mathrm{~cm}\)
  3. For fish: \(\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{B}}=36+48=84 \mathrm{~cm}\)
  4. For bird: \(\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{F}}=27+36=63 \mathrm{~cm}\).
  5. Velocity of fish with respect to bird \(=12+\left(\frac{12}{4 / 3 / 1 / 1}\right)=21 \mathrm{~cm} / \mathrm{sec}\).

Velocity of bird with respect to fish \(=12+\left(\frac{12}{3 / 4 / 1 / 1}\right)=28 \mathrm{~cm} / \mathrm{sec}\).

Example 3. Find the distance of the final image formed by the mirror

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Object Is At The Center Of Curvature Of Mirror

Solution:

Shift = \(3\left(1-\frac{1}{3 / 2}\right)\)

For mirror object is at a distance \(=21-3\left(1-\frac{1}{3 / 2}\right)=20 \mathrm{~cm}\)

∴ The object is at the center of the curvature of the mirror. Hence the light rays will retrace and an image will form on the object itself.

8.2 Refraction through a composite slab (or refraction through a number of parallel media, as seen from a medium of R. I. n0)

Apparent depth (distance of final image from final surface) = \(\frac{t_1}{n_{1 \text { rel }}}+\frac{t_2}{n_{2 \text { rel }}}+\frac{t_3}{n_{3 \text { rel }}}+\ldots \ldots . .+\frac{t_n}{n_{n \text { rel }}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refraction Through A Composite Slab

Apparent shift = \(t_1\left[1-\frac{1}{n_{1 \mathrm{rcl}}}\right]+t_2\left[1-\frac{1}{n_{2 \text { rel }}}\right]+\ldots \ldots . .+\left[1-\frac{n}{n_{n \text { rel }}}\right] t_n\)

Where ‘t’ represents thickness and ‘n’ represents the R.I. of the respective media, relative to the medium of observer. (i.e. n1rel = n1/n0, n2rel = n2/n0 etc.)

Example: Find the apparent depth of the object seen below surface AB.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Apparent Deapth Of bject Below Surface

Solution:

∴ \(D_{\alpha e p}=\sum \frac{d}{\mu}=\frac{20}{\left(\frac{2}{1.8}\right)}+\frac{15}{\left(\frac{1.5}{1.8}\right)}=18+18=36 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 1. Monochromatic light is refracted from air into the glass of refractive index μ. The ratio of the wavelength of incident and refracted waves is

  1. 1: μ
  2. 1: μ²
  3. μ: 1
  4. 1: 1

Answer: 3. μ: 1

Question 2. The index of refraction of diamond is 2.0, the velocity of light in diamond in cm/second is approximately

  1. 6×1010
  2. 3.0×1010
  3. 2×1010
  4. 1.5×1010

Answer: 4. 1.5×1010

Question 3. A beam of light is converging towards a point I on a screen. A plane glass plate whose thickness in the direction of the beam = t, refractive index = μ, is introduced in the path of the beam. The convergence point is shifted by

  1. \(\mathrm{t}\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\) away
  2. \(\mathrm{t}\left(1+\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\) away
  3. \(\mathrm{t}\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\) nearer
  4. \(\mathrm{t}\left(1+\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\) nearer

Answer: 1. \(\mathrm{t}\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\) away

Question 4. When light travels from air to water and from water to glass again from glass to CO2 gas and finally through air. The relation between their refractive indices will be given by

  1. \({ }_a n_a \times{ }_{\infty} n_{g 1} \times{ }_{g 1} n_{g a s} \times{ }_{g a s} n_a=1\)
  2. \({ }_a n_a \times{ }_{\infty} n_{g 1} \times{ }_{g a s} n_{g l} \times{ }_{g l} n_a=1\)
  3. \({ }_a n_0 \times{ }_{\infty} n_{g 1} \times{ }_{g 1} n_{\text {gess }}=1\)
  4. There is no such relation

Answer: 1. \({ }_a n_a \times{ }_{\infty} n_{g 1} \times{ }_{g 1} n_{g a s} \times{ }_{g a s} n_a=1\)

Question 5. When light enters from the air to water, then its

  1. Frequency increases and speed decreases
  2. Frequency is the same but the wavelength is smaller in water than in air
  3. Frequency is the same but the wavelength in water is greater than in air
  4. Frequency decreases and wavelength is smaller in water than in air

Answer: 2. Frequency is the same but the wavelength is smaller in water than in air

Question 6. A mark at the bottom of a liquid appears to rise by 0.1 m. The depth of the liquid is 1m. The refractive index of the liquid is

  1. 1.33
  2. 9/10
  3. 10/9
  4. 1.5

Answer: 3. 10/9

NEET Physics Class 12 Geometrical Optics Important Formulas

9 . Critical Angle And Total Internal Reflection ( T. I. R.)

The critical angle is the angle made in the denser medium for which the angle of refraction in the rarer medium is 90°.

When the angle in the denser medium is more than the critical angle the light ray reflects back in the denser medium following the laws of reflection and the interface behaves like a perfectly reflecting mirror.

In the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Critical Angle And Total Internal Reflection

O = Object

NN’ = Normal to the interface

II’ = Interface

C = Critical angle;

AB = reflected ray due to T. I. R.

When i = C then r = 90°

∴ C = \(\sin ^{-1} \frac{n_r}{n_d}\)

9.1 Conditions of T. I. R.

  1. Light is incident on the interface from a denser medium.
  2. The angle of incidence should be greater than the critical angle (i > c).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Of Incidence Should Be Greater Than Critical Angle

The figure shows a luminous object placed in the denser medium at a distance of h from an interface separating two media of refractive indices μr and μa. Subscript r and d stand for rarer and denser medium respectively.

In the figure ray 1 strikes the surface at an angle less than critical angle C and gets refracted in rarer medium. Ray 2 strikes the surface at a critical angle and grazes the interface.

Ray 3 strikes the surface making an angle more than a critical angle and gets internally reflected. The locus of points where a ray strikes at a critical angle is a circle, called the circle of illuminance (C.O.I.).

All light rays striking inside the circle of illuminance get refracted in the rarer medium. If an observer is in a rarer medium, he/she will see light coming out only from within the circle of illuminance.

If a circular opaque plate covers the circle of illuminance, no light will get refracted in the rarer medium and then the object can not be seen from the rarer medium. Radius of C.O.I can be easily found.

Example 1. Find the max. angle that can be made in glass medium (μ = 1.5) if a light ray is refracted from glass to vacuum.

Solution:

1.5 sin C = 1 sin 90°, where C = critical angle.

sin C = 2/3

C = sin-1 2/3

Example 2. Find the angle of refraction in a medium (μ = 2) if the light is incident in a vacuum, making the angle equal to twice the critical angle.

Solution:

Since the incident light is in the rarer medium. Total Internal Reflection can not take place.

C = \(\sin ^{-1} \frac{1}{\mu}=30^{\circ}\)

∴ i = 2C = 60º

Applying Snell’s Law.

1 sin 60º = 2 sin r

⇒ \(\sin r=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} \quad \Rightarrow \quad r=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4}\right)\)

Example 3. What should be the value of the angle δ so that light entering normally through the surface AC of a prism (n=3/2) does not cross the second refracting surface AB?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refraction Surface

Solution:

Light rays will pass the surface AC without bending since it is incident normally. Suppose it strikes the surface AB at an angle of incidence i.

i = 90-θ

For the required conditions:

90° – θ > C

or sin (90° – θ) > sinC

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Ray Will Pass The Surface Without Bending

Or, \(\cos \theta>\sin C=\frac{1}{3 / 2}=\frac{2}{3} \quad \text { or } \quad \theta<\cos ^{-1} \frac{2}{3} \text {. }\)

Example 4. What should be the value of refractive index n of a glass rod placed in air, so that the light entering through the flat surface of the rod does not cross the curved surface of the rod?

Solution:

It is required that all possible r’ should be more than a critical angle. This will be automatically fulfilled if minimum r’ is more than the critical angle ……….(A)

Angle r’ is minimum when r is maximum i.e. C( why ?). Therefore the minimum value of r’is 90-C.

From condition (A): 90° – C > C or C < 45°

sin C < \(\sin 45^{\circ} \quad ; \frac{1}{n} \quad<\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \text { or } n>\sqrt{2} \text {. }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refractive Index Of A Glass Rod Placed In Air

Question 1. A cut diamond sparkles because of its

  1. Hardness
  2. High refractive index
  3. Emission of light by the diamond
  4. Absorption of light by the diamond

Answer: 2. Emission of light by the diamond

Question 2. The critical angle of light passing from glass to air is minimal for

  1. Red
  2. Green
  3. Yellow
  4. Violet

Answer: 4. Violet

Question 3. For total internal reflection to take place, the angle of incidence i and the refractive index μ of the medium must satisfy the inequality

  1. \(\frac{1}{\sin i}<\mu\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sin \mathrm{i}}>\mu\)
  3. \(\sin i <\mu\)
  4. \(\sin i>\mu\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{\sin i}<\mu\)

Question 4. The critical angle is the angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the angle of refraction in the rarer medium is

  1. 57°
  2. 90°
  3. 180°

Answer: 3. 90°

10. Characteristics Of A Prism

(1) A homogeneous solid transparent and refracting medium bounded by two plane surfaces inclined at an angle is called a prism:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Characterisitcs Of Prism

(2) PQ and PR are refracting surfaces.

(3) ∠QPR = A is called the refracting angle or the angle of the prism (also called the Apex angle).

(4) δ = angle of deviation

(5) For refraction of a monochromatic (single wavelength) ray of light through a prism; δ = (i + e) – (r1 + r2) and r1 + r2 = A

∴ δ = i + e – A.

(6) Variation of δ versus i (shown in diagram).

For one δ (except δ min) there are two values of angle of incidence.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refractio Of A Monochromatic

If i and e are interchanged then we get the same value of 5 because of the reversibility principle of light

Note: (1) For the application of the above result medium on both sides of the prism must be the same.

(2) Based on the above graph we can also derive the following result, which says that i and e can be interchanged for a particular deviation in other words there are two angles of incidence for a given deviation (except minimum deviation).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Two Angle Of Incident From Deviation

(7)There is one and only one angle of incidence for which the angle of deviation is minimum.

(8)When δ = δmin, the angle of minimum deviation, then i = e and r1 = r2, the ray passes symmetrically w.r.t. the refracting surfaces. We can show by a simple calculation that δmin = 2imin – A

where imin = angle of incidence for minimum deviation, and r = A/2.

∴ \(\mathbf{n}_{\text {ret }}=\frac{\sin \left[\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right]}{\sin \left[\frac{A}{2}\right]}\), where \(\mathbf{n}_{\text {ret }}=\frac{n_{\text {prism }}}{n_{\text {surroundings }}}\)

Also \(\delta_{\min }=(n-1) \mathrm{A}\) (for small values of \(\angle \mathrm{A}\))

(9)For a thin prism \(\left(\mathrm{A} \leq 10^{\circ}\right)\) and for small value of i, all values of \(\delta=\left(n_{r e 1}-1\right) A \quad \text { where } n_{r e 1}=\frac{n_{\text {prism }}}{n_{\text {surrounding }}}\)

Example 1. The refracting angle of a prism A = 60° and its refractive index is, n = 3/2, what is the angle of incidence I to get minimum deviation? Also, find the minimum deviation. Assume the surrounding medium to be air (n = 1).

Solution:

For minimum deviation, r1 = r2 = = 30°.

Applying Snell’s law at I surface

1 × sin i = sin 30º \(\Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{i}=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{3}{4}\right) \Rightarrow \quad \delta_{\min }=2 \sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)-\frac{\pi}{3}\)

Example 2. Find the deviation caused by a prism having a refracting angle of 4º and a refractive
index of 3/2.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Snells Law

Solution: δ = (3/2 – 1) × 4° = 2°

NEET Physics Class 12 Geometrical Optics Important Formulas

11. Dispersion Of Light

The angular splitting of a ray of white light into a number of components and spreading in different directions is called Dispersion of Light. [It is for the whole Electro Magnetic Wave in totality]. This phenomenon is because waves of different wavelengths move with the same speed in a vacuum but with different speeds in a medium.

Therefore, the refractive index of a medium depends slightly on wavelength. This variation of refractive index with wavelength is given by Cauchy’s formula.

Cauchy’s formula n(λ) = \(\mathrm{n}(\lambda)=\mathrm{a}+\frac{\mathrm{b}}{\lambda^2}\) where a and b are positive constants of a medium.

Note: Such a phenomenon is not exhibited by sound waves.

The angle between the rays of the extreme colors in the refracted (dispersed) light is called the angle of dispersion. θ = δv – δr

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Of Dispersion

For prism of small ‘A’ and with small ‘i’: θ = δv – δr = (nv – nr)A

Deviation of the beam (also called mean deviation) δ = δy = (ny – 1)A

nv, nr, and ny are R. I. of material for violet, red, and yellow colors respectively.

Example 1. The refractive indices of flint glass for red and violet light are 1.613 and 1.632 respectively. Find the angular dispersion produced by a thin prism of flint glass having a refracting angle of 5°.

Solution:

The deviation of the red light is δr = (μr – 1)A and the deviation of the violet light is δv = (μv – 1)A.

The dispersion = δv – δr = (K – K) A = (1.632 – 1.6 1 3) x 50 = 0.0950 .

Note: Numerical data reveals that if the average value of K is small K – K is also small and if the average value of K is large K – K is also large.

Thus, the larger the mean deviation, the larger will be the angular dispersion.

Dispersive power (ω) of the medium of the material of prism is given by: \(\boldsymbol{\omega}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{v}}-\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{y}}-1}\)

ω is the property of a medium.

For small angled prism ( A ≤ 10° ) with a light incident at a small angle i: \(\frac{n_v-n_r}{n_y-1}=\frac{\delta_v-\delta_r}{\delta_y}=\frac{\theta}{\delta_y}=\frac{\text { angular dispersion }}{\text { deviation of mean ray (yellow) }}\)

∴ \(n_y=\frac{n_v+n_r}{2}\) if \(n_y\) is not given in the problem

n – 1 = refractivity of the medium for the corresponding color.

Example 2. The refractive index of glass for red and violet colors are 1.50 and 1.60 respectively. Find

  1. The ref. index for yellow color, approximately
  2. Dispersive power of the medium

Solution:

  1. \(\mu_r \simeq=\frac{\mu_v+\mu_{\mathrm{R}}}{2}=\frac{1.50+1.60}{2} 1.55\)
  2. \(\omega=\frac{\mu_v-\mu_R}{\mu_{\mathrm{r}}-1}=\frac{1.60-1.50}{1.55-1}=0.18\)

11. Direct Vision Combination

11.1 Dispersion without deviation (Direct Vision Combination)

The condition for direct vision combination is: \(\left[n_y-1\right] \quad A=\left[n_y^{\prime}-1\right] \quad A^{\prime} \Leftrightarrow\left[\frac{n_v+n_r}{2}-1\right] \quad A=\left[\frac{n_v^{\prime}+n_r^{\prime}}{2}-1\right] A^{\prime}\)

Two or more prisms can be combined in various ways to get different combinations of angular dispersion and deviation.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Dispersion Without Deviation

11.2 Deviation without dispersion (Achromatic Combination)

Condition for achromatic combination is (nv − nr) A = (n’v − nr) A’

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Deviation Without Dispersion

Example 1. If two prisms are combined, as shown in the figure, find the total angular dispersion and angle of deviation suffered by a white ray of light incident on the combination.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Of Deviation Suffered By A White Ray Of Light Incident On The Combination

Solution:

Both prisms will turn the light rays toward their bases and hence in the same direction. Therefore turnings caused by both prisms are additive.

Total angular dispersion

= \(\theta+\theta^{\prime}=\left(\mu_{\mathrm{V}}-\mu_{\mathrm{R}}\right) \mathrm{A}+\left(\mu_{\mathrm{V}}^{\prime}-\mu_{\mathrm{R}}^{\prime}\right) \mathrm{A}^{\prime}\)

= \((1.5-1.4) 4^{\circ}+(1.7-1.5) 2^{\circ}=0.8^{\circ}\)

Total deviation

= \(\delta+\delta^{\circ}\)

= \(\left(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{V}}+\mu_{\mathrm{R}}}{2}-1\right) \mathrm{A}+\left(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{V}}^{\prime}+\mu_{\mathrm{R}}^{\prime}}{2}-1\right) A^{\prime}=\left(\frac{1.5+1.4}{2}-1\right) 0.4^{\circ}+\left(\frac{1.7+1.5}{2}-1\right) 0.2^{\circ}\)

= \((1.45-1) 0.4^{\circ}+(1.6-1) 0.2^{\circ}\)

= \(0.45 \times 0.4^{\circ}+0.6 \times 0.2^{\circ}\)

= \(1.80+1.2=3.0^{\circ}\)

Example 2. Two thin prisms are combined to form an achromatic combination. For I prism A = 4, μR = 1.35, μr = 1.40, μv = 1.42. for II prism μ’R= 1.7, μ’r = 1.8 and μR = 1.9 find the prism angle of II prism and the net mean deviation.

Solution:

Condition for achromatic combination.

θ = 0’; \(\left(\mu_V-\mu_R\right) A=\left(\mu_V^{\prime}-\mu_R^{\prime}\right) A^{\prime}\)

∴ \(A^{\prime}=\frac{(1.42-1.35) 4^{\circ}}{1.9-1.7}=1.4^{\circ}\)

∴ \(\delta_{\text {Ne }}=\delta \sim \delta^{\prime}=\left(\mu_Y-1\right) A \sim\left(\mu_Y^{\prime}-1\right) A^{\prime}=(1.40-1) 4^{\circ} \sim(1.8-1) 1.4^{\circ}=0.48^{\circ}\).

Example 3. A crown glass prism of angle 50 is to be combined with a flint prism in such a way that the mean ray passes undeviated. Find (1) the angle of the flint glass prism needed and (2) the angular dispersion produced by the combination when white light goes through it. Refractive indices for red, yellow, and violet light are 1.5, 1.6, and 1.7 respectively for crown glass 1.8,2.0, and 2.2 for flint glass.

Solution:

The deviation produced by the crown prism is δ = (μ – 1)A

and by the flint prism is δ’ = (μ’ – 1)A’.

The prisms are placed with their angles inverted with respect to each other. The deviations are also in opposite directions.

Thus, the net deviation is: D = δ – δ’ = (μ – 1)A – (μ’ – 1)A’…..(1)

(1) If the net deviation for the mean ray is zero, (μ – 1)A = (μ’ – 1)A’.

or, \(A^{\prime}=\frac{(\mu-1)}{\left(\mu^{\prime}-1\right)} A=\frac{1.6-1}{2.0-1} \times 5^0=3^{\circ}\)

(2) The angular dispersion produced by the crown prism is: δv  – δr = (μv – μr)A

and that by the flint prism is, δ’v – δ’r = (μ’v – μ’r)A

The net angular dispersion is, (μv – μr)A – (μ’v – μ’r)A

= (1.7 – 1.5) x 5° – (2.2 – 1.8) x 3° = – 0.2°

The angular dispersion has a magnitude of 0.2°

Question 1. The formula for dispersive power is (where symbols have their usual meanings) or If the refractive indices of crown glass for red, yellow, and violet colors are respectively and then the dispersive power of this glass would be

  1. \(\frac{\mu_u-\mu_y}{\mu_r-1}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_u-\mu_r}{\mu_y-1}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_v-\mu_y}{\mu_y-\mu_r}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_u-\mu_r}{\mu_y}-1\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_u-\mu_r}{\mu_y-1}\)

Question 2. The angle of minimum deviation for a prism of refractive index 1.5 is equal to the angle of the prism. The angle of the prism is (cos 41° = 0.75)

  1. 62°
  2. 41°
  3. 82°
  4. 31°

Answer: 3. 82°

Question 3. In the formation of a primary rainbow, the sunlight rays emerge at minimum deviation from rain-drop after

  1. One internal reflection and one refraction
  2. One internal reflection and two refractions
  3. Two internal reflections and one refraction
  4. Two internal reflections and two refractions

Answer: 2. One internal reflection and two refractions

Question 4. Dispersive power depends upon

  1. The shape of a prism
  2. Material of prism
  3. Angle of prism
  4. Height of the prism

Answer: 2. Material of prism

12. Spectrum

The ordered pattern produced by a beam emerging from a prism after refraction is called a Spectrum.

12.1 Types Of Spectrum:

  1. Line spectrum: Due to source in atomic state.
  2. Band spectrum: Due to source in molecular state.
  3. Continuous spectrum: Due to white hot solid.

12.2 In Emission Spectrum: Bright colors or lines, emitted from the source are observed.

The spectrum emitted by a given source of light is called the emission spectrum. It is a wavelength-wise distribution of light emitted by the source.

The emission spectra are given by incandescent solids, liquids, and gases which are either burned directly as a flame (or a spark) or burnt under low pressure in a discharge tube.

12.3 In Absorption Spectrum: Dark lines indicate frequencies absorbed.

When a beam of light from a hot source is passed through a substance (at a lower temperature), a part of the light is transmitted but the rest of it is absorbed. With the help of a spectrometer, we can know the fraction of light absorbed corresponding to each wavelength.

The distribution of the wavelength absorption of light by a substance is called an absorption spectrum. Every substance has its own characteristic absorption spectrum.

12.4 Spectrometer: Consists of a collimator (to collimate light beam), prism, and telescope. It is used to observe the spectrum and also measure deviation.

13. Refraction At Spherical Surfaces

For paraxial rays incident on a spherical surface separating two media: \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_2-\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{R}}\)….. (A) where light moves from the medium of refractive index n to the medium of refractive index n2.

Transverse magnification (m) (of dimension perpendicular to the principal axis) due to refraction at the spherical surface is given by \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{v}-\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{u}-\mathrm{R}}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{v} / \mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{u} / \mathrm{n}_1}\right)\)

Example 1. Find the position, size, and nature of the image, for the situation shown in the figure. Draw a ray diagram.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refraction Of Ray

Solution:

For refraction near point A, u = – 30 ; R = – 20; n1 = 2 ; n2 = 1

Applying refraction formula \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_2-\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{R}} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{2}{-30}=\frac{1-2}{-20}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refractive Of Formula

v = -60 cm

m = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{\mathrm{~h}_1}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_1 v}{\mathrm{n}_2 \mathrm{u}}=\frac{2(-60)}{1(-30)}=4\)

∴ \(\mathrm{~h}_2=4 \mathrm{~mm}\).

Special Case: Refraction at Plane Surfaces

Putting R = in the formula \(\frac{n_2}{v}-\frac{n_1}{u}=\frac{n_2-n_1}{R}\), we get;

v = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2 \mathrm{u}}{\mathrm{n}_1}\)

The same sign of v and u implies that the object and the image are always on the same side of the interface separating the two media. If we write the above formula as

v = \(\frac{u}{n_{\text {rel }}} \text {, }\).

it gives the relation between the apparent depth and real depth, as we have seen before.

Geometrical Optics Class 12 NEET Notes

Example 2. Using the formula of spherical surface or otherwise, find the apparent depth of an object placed 10 cm below the water surface if seen near normally from the air.

Solution:

Put R = in the formula of the Refraction at Spherical Surfaces we get, v = \(\frac{u_2}{n_1} \quad \Rightarrow \quad u=-10 \mathrm{~cm}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refraction At Spherical Surface

⇒ \(n_1=\frac{4}{3} \quad \Rightarrow \quad n_2=1 \quad \Rightarrow \quad v=-\frac{10 \times 1}{4 / 3}=-7.5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

negative sign implies that the image is formed in water.

Aliter: \(\mathrm{d}_{\text {esp }}=\frac{\mathrm{d}_{\text {real }}}{\mu_{\text {rel }}}=\frac{10}{4 / 3}=\frac{30}{4}=7.5 \mathrm{~cm}\).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Is Formed In Water

14. Thin Lens

A thin lens is called convex if it is thicker at the middle and it is called concave if it is thicker at the ends. One surface of a convex lens is always convex. Depending on the other surface a convex lens is categorized as

  1. Biconvex or convexo-convex, if the other surface is also convex,
  2. Plano-convex if the other surface is plane and
  3. Concavo is convex if the other surface is concave.

Similarly, a concave lens is categorized as concavo-concave or biconcave, plano-concave, or convexo-concave.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Thin Lens

For a spherical, thin lens having the same medium on both sides: \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\left(n_{n e 1}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right) \cdots \ldots \ldots(1)\),

where \(\mathrm{n}_{\text {mel }}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\text {lens }}}{\mathrm{n}_{\text {medium }}}\) and \(\mathrm{R}_1\) and \(\mathrm{R}_2\) are \(\mathrm{x}\) coordinates of the center of curvature of the 1 st surface and \(2^{\text {nd }}\) surface respectively. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{i}} \rightarrow\) Lens Maker’s Formula……..(2)

Lens has two Focii: If u = \(\infty\), then \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{\infty}=\frac{1}{f} \quad \Rightarrow \quad v=f\)

⇒ If incident rays are parallel to the principal axis then its refracted ray will cut the principal axis at ‘f’. It is called 2nd focus.

In the case of a converging lens, it is positive and in the case of a diverging lens, it is negative.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Case Of Converging Lens It Is Positive And In Case Of Divergin Lens Is Negative

If v = ∞ that means \(\frac{1}{\infty}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) u = -f

If incident rays cut the principal axis at – f then its refracted ray will become parallel to the principal axis. It is called 1st focus. In the case of a converging lens, it is negative (f is positive) and in the case of a diverging lens it is positive (f is negative)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Incident Rays Cuts Principal Axis

use of – f and + f in drawing the ray diagrams.

Notice that point B, its image B’, and the pole P of the lens are collinear. This is due to the parallel slab nature of the lens in the middle. This ray goes straight.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Parallel Slab Nature Of Lens At Middle This Ray Is Straight

From the relation \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\left(\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{mel}}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right)\) it can be seen that the second focal length depends on two factors.

(1) The factor \(\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\) is

  1. Positive for all types of convex lenses and
  2. Negative for all types of concave lenses.

(2) The factor (nrel – 1) is

  1. Positive when the surrounding medium is rarer than the medium of the lens.
  2. Negative when the surrounding medium is denser than the medium of the lens.

So a lens is converging if f is positive which happens when both the factors (A) and (B) are of the same sign.

And a lens is diverging if f is negative which happens when the factors (A) and (B) are of opposite signs.

The focal length of the lens depends on the medium of the lens as well as its surroundings.

It also depends on the wavelength of incident light. The incapability of a lens to focus light rays of various wavelengths at a single point is known as chromatic aberration.

Example 1. Find the behavior of a concave lens placed in a rarer medium.

Solution:

Factor (A) is negative because the lens is concave.

Factor (B) is positive because the lens is placed in a rarer medium.

Therefore the focal length of the lens, which depends on the product of these factors, is negative and hence the lens will behave as a diverging lens.

Example 2. Show that the factor \(\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right)\) (and therefore focal length) does not depend on which surface of the lens light strike first.

Solution:

Consider a convex lens of radii of curvature p and q as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Convex Lens Of radii Of Curvature

Case 1: Suppose light is incident from the left side and strikes the surface with a radius of curvature p, first.

Then \(R_1=+p ; R_2=-q\) and \(\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)=\left(\frac{1}{p}-\frac{1}{-q}\right)\)

Case 2: Suppose light is incident from the right side and strikes the surface with a radius of curvature q, first.

Then \(\mathrm{R}_1=+\mathrm{q} ; \mathrm{R}_2=-\mathrm{p}\) and \(\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)=\left(\frac{1}{q}-\frac{1}{-p}\right)\)

Though we have shown the result for the biconvex lens, it is true for every lens.

Example 3. Find the focal length of the lens shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Focal Length Of Lens

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(n_{r d}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=(3 / 2-1)\left(\frac{1}{10}-\frac{1}{(-10)}\right) \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2}{10} \Rightarrow \quad f=+10 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 4. Find the focal length of the lens shown in the figure

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(n_{\text {rol }}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{-10}-\frac{1}{10}\right) f=-10 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 5. Find the focal length of the lens shown in the figure

  1. If the light is incident from the left side.
  2. If the light is incident from the right side.

Solution:

(1) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\left(\mathrm{n}_{\text {re1 }}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right)=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{-60}-\frac{1}{-20}\right) \quad \mathrm{f}=60 \mathrm{~cm}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Light Is Incident From Left Side

(2) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\left(\mathrm{n}_{\text {me1 }}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right)=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{20}-\frac{1}{60}\right) \quad \mathrm{f}=60 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 6. The point object is placed on the principal axis of a thin lens with parallel curved boundaries i.e., having the same radii of curvature. Discuss the position of the image formed.

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(n_{r e d}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)=0\)

because \(R_1=R_2\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=0\) or v = u i.e. rays pass without appreciable bending.

Example 7. The focal length of a thin lens in air is 10 cm. Now medium on one side of the lens is replaced by a medium of refractive index μ=2. The radius of curvature of the surface of the lens, in contact with the medium, is 20 cm. Find the new focal length

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Focal Length Of The Thin Lens In Air

Solution:

Let the radius of the I surface be R1 and the refractive index of the lens be μ.

Let parallel rays be incident on the lens.

Applying refraction formula at first surface \(\frac{\mu}{V_1}-\frac{1}{\infty} \quad=\frac{\mu-1}{R_1}\)……(1)

At 2 surface \(\frac{2}{V}-\frac{\mu}{V_1}=\frac{2-\mu}{-20}\)……(2)

Adding (1) and (2) \(\frac{\mu}{V_1}-\frac{1}{\infty}+\frac{2}{V}-\frac{\mu}{V_1}=\frac{\mu-1}{R_1}+\frac{2-\mu}{-20}\)

= \((\mu-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{-20}\right)-\frac{\mu-1}{20}-\frac{2-\mu}{20}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}} \text { (in air) }+\frac{1}{20}-\frac{2}{20}\)

v = 40cm

f = 40 cm

Example 8. Shown a point object and a converging lens. Find the final image formed.

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{-15}=\frac{1}{10} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{10}-\frac{1}{15}=\frac{1}{30}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Point Obejct And Converging Lens Real Image

v = +30 cm

Example 9. Find the position of the final image formed.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Position Of Final Image

Solution:

For converging lens

u = –15 cm, f = 10 cm v = \(\frac{f u}{f+u}=30 \mathrm{~cm}\)

For diverging lens u = 5 cm

f = –10 cm; v = \(\frac{f u}{f+u}=10 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 10. Shows two converging lenses. Incident rays are parallel to the principal axis. What should be the value of d so that the final rays are also parallel?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Two Converging Lenses Incident Rays Are Parallel To Principal Axis

Solution:

The final rays should be parallel. For this, the 2 focus of L1 must coincide with the I focus of L2

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Final Rays Should Be Parallel

d = 10 + 20 = 30 cm

14.2 Transverse Magnification (m)

Transverse magnification (m) of (of dimension perpendicular to the principal axis) is given by m = \(\frac{v}{u}\)

If the lens is thick or/and the medium on both sides is different, then we have to apply the formula given for refraction at spherical surfaces step by step.

Example 1. An extended real object of size 2 cm is placed perpendicular to the principal axis of a converging lens of focal length 20 cm. The distance between the object and the lens is 30 cm.

  1. Find the lateral magnification produced by the lens.
  2. Find the height of the image.
  3. Find the change in lateral magnification, if the object is brought closer to the lens by 1 mm along the principal axis.

Solution:

Using \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}\) and \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\)

we get \(m=\frac{f}{f+u} \pm\)……(A)

m = \(\frac{+20}{+20+(-30)}=\frac{+20}{-10}=-2\)

-ve sign implies that the image is inverted.

(2) \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{\mathrm{~h}_1}=\mathrm{m}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{h}_2=\frac{-\mathrm{f}}{(\mathrm{f}+\mathrm{u})^2} \mathrm{mh}_1=(-2)(2)=-4 \mathrm{~cm}\)

(3) Differentiating (A) we get \(\mathrm{dm}=\frac{-\mathrm{f}}{(\mathrm{f}+\mathrm{u})^2} \mathrm{du}=\frac{-(20)}{(-10)^2}(0.1)=\frac{-2}{100}=-.02\)

Note that the method of differential is valid only when changes are small.

Alternate method: u(after displacing the object) = -(30 + 0.1) = – 29.9 cm

Applying the formula \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{f}}{\mathrm{f}+\mathrm{u}} ; \quad \mathrm{m}=\frac{20}{20+(-29.9)}=-2.02\)

∴ change in \(m \text { ‘ }=-0.02 \text {. }\)

Since in this method differential is not used, this method can be used for changes, small or large.

14.3 Displacement Method To Find Focal Length Of Converging Lens

Fix an object of small height H and a screen at a distance of D from an object (as shown in the figure).

Move a converging lens from the object towards the screen. Let a sharp image form on the screen when the distance between the object and the lens is ‘a. From the lens formula we haveNEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Displacement Method To Find Local Length Of Converging Lens

⇒ \(\frac{1}{D-a}-\frac{1}{-a}=\frac{1}{f} \quad \text { or } \quad a^2-D a+f D=0 \ldots(A)\)

This is a quadratic equation and hence two values of ‘a’ are possible. Call them a1 and a2.

Thus a1 and a2 are the roots of the equation. From the properties of roots of a quadratic equation,

∴ a1 + a2 = D ⇒ a1a2 = f D

Also \(\left(a_1-a_2\right)=\sqrt{\left(a_1+a_2\right)^2-4 a_1 a_2}=\sqrt{D^2-4 f D}=d \text { (suppose). }\)

‘d’ physically means the separation between the two positions of the lens.

The focal length of the lens in terms of D and d.

so, \(a_1-a_2=\sqrt{\left(a_1+a_2\right)^2-4 a_1 a_2}\)

= \(\sqrt{\mathrm{D}^2-4 \mathrm{fD}}=\mathrm{d} \quad \Rightarrow \quad f=\frac{\mathrm{D}^2-\mathrm{d}^2}{4 \mathrm{D}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Focal Length Of Lens In Terms D And d

condition, d = 0, i.e. the two position coincide f = \(\frac{\mathrm{D}^2}{4 \mathrm{D}}\)

∴ D = 4f

Roots of the equation a² – Da + f D = 0, become imaginary if b² – 4ac < 0. = D² -4fD < 0 = D (D- 4f) < 0 = D – 4f = 0

for real value of a in equation a² – Da + f D = 0

b² — 4ac ≥ 0. = D² — 4f D ≥ 0.

so D ≥ 4f ⇒ Dmin = 4f

Lateral Magnification In Displacement Method: if m1 and m2 be two magnifications in two positions (In the displacement method)

⇒ \(m_1=\frac{v_1}{u_1}=\frac{\left(D-a_1\right)}{-a_1} \quad m_2=\frac{v_2}{u_2}=\frac{D-a_2}{-a_2}=\frac{a_1}{-\left(D-a_1\right)}\)

So \(m_1 m_2=\frac{\left(D-a_1\right)}{-a_1} \times \frac{a_1}{-\left(D-a_1\right)}=1\).

If image length is h1 and h2 in the two cases, then \(m_1=-\frac{h_1}{H}; m_2=-\frac{h_2}{H}; m_1 m_2=1\)

∴ \(\frac{h_1 h_2}{H^2}=1 ; h_1 h_2=H^2 ; H=\sqrt{h_1 h_2}\)

Question 1. The radius of curvature for a convex lens is 40 cm, for each surface. Its refractive index is 1.5. The focal length will be

  1. 40 cm
  2. 20 cm
  3. 80 cm
  4. 30 cm

Answer: 1. 40 cm

Question 2. A thin lens focal length of f1 and an aperture has a diameter of d. It forms an image of intensity I. Now the central part of the aperture up to diameter d/2 is blocked by an opaque paper. The focal length and image intensity will change to

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{f}}{2}\) and \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{2}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{f}\) and \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{3 \mathrm{f}}{4}\) and \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{2}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{f}\) and \(\frac{3 \mathrm{I}}{4}\)

Answer: 4. \(\mathrm{f}\) and \(\frac{3 \mathrm{I}}{4}\)

Question 3. A lens of power +2 diopters is placed in contact with a lens of power –1 diopter. The combination will behave like

  1. A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm
  2. A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm
  3. A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm
  4. A convergent lens of focal length 200 cm

Answer: 3. A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm

Geometrical Optics Class 12 NEET Notes

Question 4. If in a plano-convex lens, the radius of curvature of the convex surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the lens is 30 cm, then the refractive index of the material of the lens will be

  1. 1.5
  2. 1 .66
  3. 1.33
  4. 3

Answer: 3. 1.33

Question 5. The silt of a collimator is illuminated by a source as shown in the adjoining figures. The distance between the silt S and the collimating lens L is equal to the focal length of the lens. The correct direction of the emergent beam will be as shown in the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Slit Of A Collimator Is Illuminated By A Source

  1. 1
  2. 3
  3. 2
  4. None of the figures

Answer: 3. 2

Question 6. A convex lens makes a real image 4 cm long on a screen. When the lens is shifted to a new position without disturbing the object, we again get a real image on the screen which is 16 cm tall. The length of the object must be

  1. 1/4 cm
  2. 8 cm
  3. 12 cm
  4. 20 cm

Answer: 2. 8 cm

Question 7. A thin convex lens of refractive index 1.5 has a focal length of 15 cm in air. When the lens is placed in a liquid of refractive index 4/3, its focal length will be

  1. 15 cm
  2. 10 cm
  3. 30 cm
  4. 60 cm

Answer: 4. 60 cm

Image Formation By A Lens

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Image Formation By A Lens

15. Combination Of Lenses

The equivalent focal length of thin lenses in contact is given by \(\frac{1}{F}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}+\frac{1}{f_3} \ldots\)

where f1, f2, f3 are the focal lengths of individual lenses.

If two converging lenses are separated by a distance d and the incident light rays are parallel to the common principal axis , then the combination behaves like a single lens of focal length given by the relation \(\frac{1}{F}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}-\frac{d}{f_1 f_2}\) and the position of equivalent lens is \(\frac{-\mathrm{d} \quad \mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{f}_1}\) with respect to 2nd lens

Example 1. Find the lateral magnification produced by the combination of lenses shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Lateral Magnification Produced By The Combination Of Lense

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_1}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_2}=\frac{1}{10}-\frac{1}{20}=\frac{1}{20} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{f}=+20\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{-10}=\frac{1}{20} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{20}-\frac{1}{10}=\frac{-1}{20}=-20 \mathrm{~cm}\)

∴ m = 2

Example 2. Find the focal length of the equivalent system.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Focal Length Of Equivalent System

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_1}=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\right)=\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2}{10}=\frac{1}{10}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_2}=\left(\frac{6}{5}-1\right)\left(\frac{-1}{10}-\frac{1}{20}\right)=\frac{1}{5} \times\left(\frac{-30}{10 \times 20}\right) \quad=\frac{-3}{100}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_3}=\left(\frac{8}{5}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{20}+\frac{1}{20}\right)=\frac{3}{50}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_1}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_2}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_3}=\frac{1}{10}+\frac{-3}{100}+\frac{3}{50} \mathrm{f}=\frac{100}{13}\)

Question 1. Two similar plano-convex lenses are combined together in three different ways as shown in the adjoining figure. The ratio of the focal lengths in three cases will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Two Similar Plano Convex Lenses Are Combinated Together In Three Different Ways

  1. 2 : 2: 1
  2. 1: 1: 1
  3. 1 : 2: 2
  4. 2: 1: 1

Answer: 2. 1: 1: 1

Question 2. A concave and convex lens have the same focal length of 20 cm and are put into contact to form a lens combination. The combination is used to view an object of 5 cm length kept at 20 cm from the lens combination. As compared to the object, the image will be

  1. Magnified and inverted
  2. Reduced and erect
  3. Of the same size as the object and erect
  4. Of the same size as the object but inverted

Answer: 3. Of the same size as the object and erect

16. Combination Of Lens And Mirror

The combination of lens and mirror behaves like a mirror of focal length ‘f given by \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~F}_{\mathrm{m}}}-\frac{2}{\mathrm{~F}_{\ell}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Combination Of Lens And Mirror

If lenses are more than one, ‘f’ is given by \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~F}_{\mathrm{m}}}-2\left(\sum \frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_{\ell}}\right)\)

For the following figure ‘f’ is given by \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~F}_{\mathrm{m}}}-2\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_1}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_2}\right)\)

Example: Find the position of the final image formed. (The gap shown in the figure is of negligible width)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Position Of Final Image Formed

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_{e q}}=\frac{1}{10}-\frac{2}{10}=\frac{-1}{10} \Rightarrow f_{e q}=-10 \mathrm{~cm}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{-20}=\frac{1}{-10} \quad \Rightarrow v=-20 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Hence image will be formed on the object itself

Some Interesting Facts About Light:

(1)The Sun Rises Before It Actually Rises And Sets After It Actually Sets: The atmosphere is less dense as its height increases, and it is also known that the index of refraction decreases with a decrease in density. So, there is a decrease in the index of refraction with height. Due to this, the light rays bend as they move in the earth’s atmosphere

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Sun Rises Before It Actually Rises And Sets After It Actually Sets

(2)The Sun Is Oval Shaped At The Time Of Its Rise And Set: The rays diverging from the lower edge of the sun have to cover a greater thickness of air than the rays from the upper edge. Hence the former are refracted more than the latter, and so the vertical diameter of the sun appears to be a little shorter than the horizontal diameter which remains unchanged.

(3)The Stars Twinkle But Not The Planets: The refractive index of the atmosphere fluctuates by a small amount due to various reasons. This causes a slight variation in the bending of light due to which the apparent position of the star also changes, producing the effect of twinkling.

(4)Glass Is Transparent, But Its Powder Is White: When powdered, light is reflected from the surface of innumerable small pieces of glass and so the powder appears white. Glass transmits most of the incident light and reflects very little hence it appears transparent.

(5)Greased Or Oiled Paper Is Transparent, But Paper Is White: The rough surface of paper diffusely reflects incident light so it appears white. When oiled or greased, very little reflection takes place and most of the light is allowed to pass hence it appears transparent.

(6)An Extended Water Tank Appears Shallow At The Far End:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics An Extended Water Tank Appears Shallow At The Far End

(7)A Test Tube Or A Smoked Ball Immersed In Water Appears Silvery White When Viewed From The Top: This is due to Total internal reflection

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics A Test Tube Or A Smoked Ball

(8)Ships Hang Inverted In The Air In Cold Countries And Trees Hang Inverted Underground In Deserts:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Total Interal Reflection

17. Structure Of Eye

Light enters the eye through a curved front surface, the corner. It passes through the pupil which is the central hole in the iris. The size of the pupil can change under the control of muscles.

The light is further focussed by the eye lens on the retina. The retina is a film of nerve fibers covering the curved back surface of the eye. The retina contains rods and cones that sense light intensity and color, respectively, and transmit electrical signals via the optic nerve to the brain which finally processes this information.

The shape (curvature) and therefore the focal length of the lens can be modified somewhat by the ciliary muscles. For example, when the muscle is released, the focal length is about 2.5 cm and (for a normal eye) objects at infinity are in sharp focus on the retinas.

When the object is brought closer to the eye, in order to maintain the same image-lens distance (2.5 cm), the focal length of the eye-lens becomes shorter by the action of the ciliary muscles. This property of the eye is called accommodation. If the object is too close to the eye, the lens cannot curve enough to focus the image onto the retina, and the image is blurred.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Structure Of Eye

The closest distance for which the lens can focus light on the retina is called the least distance of distinct vision, or the near point. The standard value (for normal vision) taken here is 25 cm. (Often the near point is given the symbol D.)

Geometrical Optics NEET Physics Chapter 7 Study Material

18. Defects Of Vision

Regarding the eye, it is nothing that:

(1)In eye convex, the eye lens forms real inverted and diminished images at the retina by changing its convexity (the distance between the eye lens and the retina is fixed)

(2)The human eye is most sensitive to yellow-green light having wavelength 5550 A° and least to violet (4000 A°) and red (7000 A°)

(3)The size of an object as perceived by the eye depends on its visual angle when the object is distant its visual angle and hence image L, at the retina is small (it will appear small), and as it is brought near to the eye its visual angle and hence the size of the image I2 will increase.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Defects Of Vision

(4)The far and near points for the normal eye are usually taken to be infinity and 25 cm respectively ie., the normal eye can see very distant objects clearly but near objects only if they are at a distance greater than 25 cm from the eye. The ability of the eye to see objects from an infinite distance to 25 cm from it is called the Power of accommodation.

(5)If the object is at infinity i.e., a parallel beam of light enters the eye is least strained and said to be relaxed or unstrained. However, if the object is at least a distance of distinct vision (L.D.D.V] i.e., D (=25 cm) eye is under maximum strain, and the visual angle is maximum.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Parallel Beam Of Light Enters The Eye Is Least Strained

The limit of resolution of the eye is one minute ie., two objects will not be visible distinctly to the eye if the angle subtended by them on the eye is less than one minute.

The persistance of vision is (1/10) sec i.e., If the time interval between two consecutive light pulses is lesser than 0.1 sec eye cannot distinguish them separately. This fact is taken into account in motion pictures.

In the case of the eye following are the common defects of vision.

18.1 Myopia

[or short-sightedness or near – near-sightendness]

In it, distant objects are not clearly visible. i.e. Far Point is at a distance lesser than Infinity and hence the image of a distant object is formed before the retina.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Myopia

This defect is (i.e., negative focal length or power) which forms the image of a distant object at the far point of the patient – eye [which is lesser than ] so that in this case from lens formula we have \(\frac{1}{-F. P}-\frac{1}{-(\text { distance of object })}=\frac{1}{f}=P\) And if the object is at \(\quad P=\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{-F . P .} \quad \ldots\)

where F.P is the farther point of the eye

18.2 Hypermetropia

[Or Long-sightedness or far-sightendness]

In it near objects are not clearly visible i.e., Near Point is at a distance greater than 25 cm and hence the image of the near object is formed behind the retina.

This defect is remedied by using spectacles having a convergent lens (i.e., positive focal length of power) which is the image of near objects at the Near Point of the Patient-eye (which is more than 25 cm).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Hypermetropia

So in this case from the lens formula we have \(\frac{1}{- \text { N.P. }} \frac{1}{- \text { F.P. }}-\frac{1}{-(\text { distance of object })}=\frac{1}{f}=P\)

If object is placed at D = 25 cm = 0.25 cm

P = \(\frac{1}{f}=\left[\frac{1}{0.25}-\frac{1}{N . P .}\right]\)…..(2)

where N.P is near the point of the eye

18.3 Presbyopia

In this both near and far objects are not clearly visible i.e., the far point is lesser than infinity and the near point is greater than 25 cm. It is an old age disease as in old age ciliary muscles lose their elasticity and so can not change the focal length of the eye-lens effectively hence eye loses its power of accommodation.

18.4 Astigmatism

Due to the imperfect spherical nature of the eye-lens, the focal length of the eye lens in two orthogonal directions becomes different so the eye cannot see objects in two orthogonal directions clearly simultaneously.

This defect is directional and is remedied by using the cylindrical lens in a particular direction. If in the spectacle of a person suffering from astigmatism, the lens is slightly rotated the arrangement will get spoiled.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Astigmatism

Question 1. For a normal eye, the least distance of distinct vision is

  1. 0.25 m
  2. 0.50 m
  3. 25 m
  4. Infinite

Answer: 1. 0.25 m

Question 2. For the myopic eye, the defect is cured by

  1. Convex lens
  2. Concave lens
  3. Cylindrical lens
  4. Toric lens

Answer: 2. Concave lens

Question 3. Lens used to remove long-sightedness (hypermetropia ) is or A person suffering from hypermetropia requires which type of spectacle lenses

  1. Concave lens
  2. Plano- concave lens
  3. Convexo- concave lens
  4. Convex lens

Answer: 4. Convex lens

Question 4. The image formed on the retina is

  1. Real and inverted
  2. Virtual and erect
  3. Real and erect
  4. Virtual and inverted

Answer: 1. Real and inverted

Chromatic Aberration

The image of a white object in white light formed by a lens is usually colored and blurred. This defect of the image is called chromatic aberration and arises due to the fact that the focal length of a lens is different for different colors. As the R.I. μ of the lens is maximum for violet while minimum for red, violet is focused nearest to the lens while red is farthest from it as shown in the figure.

As a result of this, in the case of the convergent lens if a screen is placed at Fv center of the image will be violet and focused while the sides are red and blurred. While at FR, the reverse is the case, i.e., the center will be red and focused while the sides violet and blurred. The difference between fv and fR is a measure of the longitudinal chromatic aberration (L.C.A), i.e., L.C.A = \(f_R-f_V=-d f \text { with } d f=f_v-f_R\)……(1)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Chromatic Aberration

However, as for a single lens, \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(\mu-1)\left[\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right]\)……(1)

– \(\frac{\mathrm{df}}{\mathrm{f}^2}=\mathrm{d} \mu\left[\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right]\)…….(2)

Dividing Equation (3) by (2);

– \(\frac{\mathrm{df}}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \mu}{(\mu-1)}=\omega \quad\left[\omega=\frac{\mathrm{d} \mu}{(\mu-1)}\right]\) = dispersive power…….(4)

And hence, from Eqns. (1) and (4),

L.C.A. = –df = ωf

Now, as for a single lens neither f nor  can be zero, we cannot have a single lens free from chromatic aberration.

Condition Of Achromatism: In case of two thin lenses in contact  \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~F}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_1}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_2}\)

i.e., \(-\frac{d F}{F^2}=-\frac{d f_1}{f_1^2}-\frac{d f_2}{f_2^2}\)

The combination will be free from chromatic aberration if dF = 0

i.e., \(\frac{\mathrm{df}_1}{\mathrm{f}_1^2}+\frac{\mathrm{df}_2}{\mathrm{f}_2^2}=0\)

which with the help of Eqn. (4) reduces to \(\frac{\omega_1 f_1}{f_1^2}+\frac{\omega_2 f_2}{f_2^2}=0 \quad \text { i.e., } \frac{\omega_1}{f_1}+\frac{\omega_2}{f_2}=0\)……(5)

This condition is called the condition of achromatism (for two thin lenses in contact) and the lens combination which satisfies this condition is called achromatic lens, from this condition, i.e., from Eqn.

(5) it is clear that in the case of achromatic doublet:

(1) The two lenses must be of different materials.

Since, if \(\omega_1=\omega_2, \quad \frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}=0 \quad \text { i.e., } \quad \frac{1}{F}=0\) or \(F=\infty\)

i.e., combination will not behave as a lens, but as a plane glass plate.

(2) As ω1 and ω2 are positive quantities, for equation (5) to hold, f1 and f2 must be of opposite nature, i.e. if one of the lenses is converging the other must be diverging.

(3) If the achromatic combination is convergent, \(\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{c}}<\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{D}} \quad \text { and as } \quad-\frac{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{D}}}=\frac{\omega_{\mathrm{C}}}{\omega_{\mathrm{D}}}, \quad \omega_{\mathrm{C}}<\omega_{\mathrm{D}}\)

i.e., in a convergent achromatic doublet, a convex lens has lesser focal length and dispersive power than the divergent one.

Question 1. Chromatic aberration in the formation of images by a lens arises because:

  1. Of non-paraxial rays.
  2. The radii of curvature of the two sides are not the same.
  3. Of the defect in grinding.
  4. The focal length varies with wavelength.

Answer: 4. The focal length varies with wavelength.

Question 2. Chromatic aberration of a lens can be corrected by:

  1. Providing different suitable curvatures of its two surfaces.
  2. Proper polishing of its two surfaces.
  3. Suitably combining it with another lens.
  4. Reducing its aperture.

Answer: 3. Suitably combining it with another lens.

Question 3. A combination is made of two lenses of focal lengths f and f’ in contact; the dispersive powers of the materials of the lenses are 0 and 0′. The combination is achromatic when:

  1. \(\omega=\omega_0, \omega^{\prime}=2 \omega_0, f^{\prime}=2 f\)
  2. \(\omega=\omega_0, \omega^{\prime}=2 \omega_0, f^{\prime}=f / 2\)
  3. \(\omega=\omega_0, \omega^{\prime}=2 \omega_0, f^{\prime}=-f / 2\)
  4. \(\omega=\omega_0, \omega^{\prime}=2 \omega_0, f^{\prime}=-2 f\)

Answer: 4. \(\omega=\omega_0, \omega^{\prime}=2 \omega_0, f^{\prime}=-2 f\)

From points (2) and (3) of passage: f and f’ must be of opposite sign.

Also ωc < ωo and fc < fD which is satisfied only by (4).

Question 4. The dispersive power of crown and flint glasses are 0.02 and 0.04 respectively. An achromatic converging lens of focal length 40 cm is made by keeping two lenses, one of crown glass and the other of flint glass, in contact with each other. The focal lengths of the two lenses are:

  1. 20 cm and 40 cm
  2. 20 cm and –40 cm
  3. –20cm and 40 cm
  4. 10 cm and –20cm

Answer: 2. 20 cm and –40 cm

⇒ \(\frac{\omega_1}{f_1}+\frac{\omega_2}{f_2}=0 \Rightarrow \frac{\omega_1}{\omega_2}=-\frac{f_1}{f_2}=\frac{1}{2}\)…..(1)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{F}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}=\frac{1}{40}\)…..(2)

After solving (1)and (2) \(f_1=20 \mathrm{~cm} \quad f_2=-40 \mathrm{~cm} \text {. }\)

Question 5. Chromatic aberration in a spherical concave mirror is proportional to :

  1. f
  2. 1/f
  3. None of these

Answer: 4. None of these

Chromatic aberration doesn’t occur in the case of spherical mirrors

Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Optical Instruments

Definition: Optical instruments are used primarily to assist the eye in viewing an object.

Types of Instruments: Depending upon the use, optical instruments can be categorized in the following way

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Types Of Instruments

1. Microscope

It is an optical instrument used to increase the visual angle of neat objects that are too small to be seen by the naked eye.

1.1 Simple Microscope: It is also known as a magnifying glass or simply magnifier and consists of a convergent lens with the object between its focus and optical center and the eye close to it. The image formed by it is erect, virtually enlarged, and on the same side of the lens between the object and infinity.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Simple Microscope

The magnifying power (MP) or angular magnification of a simple microscope (or an optical instrument) is defined as the ratio of the visual angle with an instrument to the maximum visual angle for clear vision when the eye is unadded (i.e. when the object is at least distance of distinct vision)

i.e., magnifying power is M.P

MP = \(\frac{\text { Visual angle with instrument }}{\text { Max.visual angle for unadded eye }}=\frac{\theta}{\theta_0}\)

If an object of size h is placed at a distance u (< D) from the lens and its image size h’ is formed at a distance V (D) from the eye \(\theta=\frac{\mathrm{h}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{v}}=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{u}} \quad \text { with } \theta_0=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{D}}\)

So magnifying power MP = \(\frac{\theta}{\theta_0}=\frac{h}{u} \times \frac{D}{h}=\frac{D}{u}\)…..(1)

Now there are two possibilities

(a1) If their image is at infinity [Far point] In this situation from lens formula  \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have \(\frac{1}{\infty}-\frac{1}{-u}=\frac{1}{f}\) i.e., u=f

So \(M P=\frac{D}{u}=\frac{D}{f}\)…..(2)

As here u is maximum [as the object is to be within focus], MP is minimum and as in this situation parallel beam of light enters the eye, the eye is least strained and is said to be normal, relaxed, or unstrained.

(a2) If the image is at D [Near point] In this situation as v=D, from lens formula \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have \(\frac{1}{-D}-\frac{1}{-u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

i.e., \(\quad \frac{D}{u}=1+\frac{D}{f} \quad So \quad M P=\frac{D}{u}=\left[1+\frac{D}{f}\right]\)…..(3)

As the minimum value of v for clear vision is D, in this situation u is the minimum and hence this is the maximum possible MP of a simple microscope in this situation final image is closest to the eye, eye is under maximum strain.

Special Points

  1. A simple magnifier is an essential part of most optical instruments (such as a microscope or telescope) in the form of an eyepiece or an ocular.
  2. The magnifying power (MP) has no unit. It is different from the power of a lens which is expressed in diopter (D) and is equal to the reciprocal of focal length in metre.
  3. With the increase in the wavelength of light used, the focal length of the magnifier will increase and hence its MP will decrease.

Example: A man with a normal near point (25 cm) reads a book with small print using a magnifying a thin convex lens of focal length 5 cm. (1) What is the closest farthest distance at which he can read the book when viewing through the magnifying glass? (2) What is the maximum and minimum MP possible using the above simple microscope?

Solution:

(1)As for the normal eye far and near points are 25 cm respectively, so for the magnifier and

However, for a lens as \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \quad \text { i.e., } \quad u=\frac{f}{\left(\frac{f}{v}\right)-1}\)

So u will be minimum when

i.e., \((\mathrm{u})_{\min }=\frac{5}{\left(\frac{-5}{25}\right)-1}=-\frac{25}{6}=-4.17 \mathrm{~cm}\)

And u will be maximum when

So, the closest and furthest distance of the book from the magnifier (or eye) for clear viewing is 4.17 cm and 5 cm respectively.

(2)An in case of simple magnifier MP = (\(\frac{D}{u}\)). So MP will be minimum when u = max = 5 cm

i.e., \((M P)_{\min }=\frac{-25}{-5}=5 \quad\left[=\frac{D}{f}\right]\)

And MP will be maximum when \(\mathrm{u}=\min =\left(\frac{25}{6}\right) \mathrm{cm}\)

i.e., \((M P)_{\max }=\frac{-25}{-\left(\frac{25}{6}\right)}=6\left[=1+\frac{D}{f}\right]\)

1.2 Compound-Microscope

Construction: It consists of two convergent lenses of short focal lengths and apertures arranged co-axially lens (of focal length f0) facing the object is called an objective or field lens while the lens (of focal length f0) facing the eye, eye-piece or ocular. The objective has a smaller aperture and smaller focal length than the eyepiece. The separation between objective and eye-piece can be varied.

Image Formation: The object is placed between F and 2F of the objective so the image IM formed by the objective (called intermediate image) is inverted, real enlarged, and at a distance greater than f0 on the other side of the lens. This image IM acts as an object for an eye-piece and is within its focus. So eye-piece forms the final image I which is erect, virtual, and enlarged with respect to the intermediate image IM.

So the final image I with respect to the object is inverted, virtual, enlarged, and at a distance D from the eye on the same side of the eye-piece as IM. This all is shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Compound Microscope

Magnifying power (MP)

The magnifying power of an optical instrument is defined as \(\mathrm{MP}=\frac{\text { Visual angle with instrument }}{\text { Max. Visual angle for unadded eye }}=\frac{\theta}{\theta_0}\)

If the size of the object is h and the least distance of distinct vision is D.

⇒ \(\theta_0=\left[\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right] \times\left[\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{h}}\right]=\left[\frac{\mathrm{h}^{\mathrm{\prime}}}{\mathrm{h}}\right]\left[\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right]\)

But for objective \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{l}}{\mathrm{O}}=\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}} \text { i.e., } \frac{\mathrm{h}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{h}}=-\frac{v}{u} \text { [as } \mathrm{u} \text { is positive] }\)

So, MP = \(-\frac{v}{u}\left[\frac{D}{u_c}\right]\) with length of tube \(\mathrm{L}=\mathrm{v}+\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{e}^{\prime}}\)……(1) now there are two possibilities

(b1) If the final image is at infinity (far point):

This situation is called normal adjustment as in this situation eye is least strained or relaxed. In this situation as for eye-piece V = ∞

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-\infty}-\frac{1}{-u_e}=\frac{1}{f_e} \text { i.e., } \quad u_e=f_e=\text { maximum }\)

Substitution this value of in equation (1), we have \(M P=-\frac{v}{u}\left[\frac{D}{f_e}\right] \text { with } L=v+f_e\)

MP = \(-\frac{v}{u}\left[\frac{D}{f_e}\right] \text { with } L=v+f_e\)…….(2)

A microscope is usually considered to operate in this mode unless stated otherwise. In this mode, as ue is maximum MP is minimum for a given microscope.

(b2) If The Final Image Is At D (Near Point): In this situation as for eye-piece v = D

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-D}-\frac{1}{-u_e}=\frac{1}{f_e} \quad \text { i.e., } \quad \frac{1}{u_e}=\frac{1}{D}\left[1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right]\)

Substituting this value of \(u_d\) in equation (1), we have

MP = \(-\frac{v}{u}\left[1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right] \quad \text { with } \quad L=v+\frac{f_e D}{f_e+D}\)…..(3)

In this situation as ue is minimum MP is maximum and the eye is most strained.

Example: The focal length of the objective and eyepiece of a microscope are 2 cm and 5 cm respectively and the distance between them is 20 cm. Find the distance of the object from the objective, when the final image seen by the eye is 25 cm from the eyepiece. Also, find the magnifying power.

Solution:

Given \(\mathrm{f}_0=2 \mathrm{~cm}, \mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{e}}=5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

⇒ \(\left|v_0\right|+\left|u_e\right|=20 \mathrm{~cm}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{e}}=-25 \mathrm{~cm}\)

From lens formula  \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{c}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{o}}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{c}}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{e}}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{e}}}=-\frac{1}{25}-\frac{1}{5}\)

⇒ \(u_0=-\frac{25}{6} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Distance of real image from objective \(v_0=20-\frac{25}{6}\left|u_0\right|=20-=\frac{120-25}{6}=\frac{95}{6} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Now \(\frac{1}{f_0}=\frac{1}{v_0}-\frac{1}{u_0}\) given \(\frac{1}{u_0}=\frac{1}{v_0}-\frac{1}{f_0}=\frac{1}{(95 / 6)}-\frac{1}{2}\)

i.e., \(\frac{1}{u_0}=\frac{6}{95}-\frac{1}{2}=\frac{12-95}{190}=-\frac{83}{190}\)

∴ \(u_o=-\frac{190}{83}=-2.3 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Magnifying power M = \(-\frac{\mathrm{v}_0}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{o}}}\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{f}_e}\right)=-\frac{95 / 6}{(190 / 83)}\left(1+\frac{25}{3}\right)=-41.5\)

Question 1. The focal lengths of the objective and eye lens of a microscope are 1 cm and 5cm respectively If the magnifying power for the relaxed eye is 45, then the length of the tube is

  1. 30 cm
  2. 25 cm
  3. 15cm
  4. 12 cm

Answer: 3. 15cm

Question 2. In a compound microscope magnification will be large, if the focal length of the eyepiece is

  1. Large
  2. Smaller
  3. Equal to that of objective
  4. Less than that of objective

Answer: 2. Smaller

Question 3. The magnifying power of a simple microscope is (when the final image is formed at D= 25 cm from the eye)

  1. \(\frac{D}{f}\)
  2. 1 + \(\frac{D}{f}\)
  3. 1 + \(\frac{f}{D}\)
  4. 1- \(\frac{D}{f}\)

Answer: 2. 1 + \(\frac{D}{f}\)

Geometrical Optics NEET Physics Chapter 7 Study Material

Question 4. If in a compound microscope m1 and m2 be the linear magnification of the objective lens and eye lens respectively then the magnifying power of the compound microscope will be

  1. \(m_1-m_2\)
  2. \(\sqrt{m_1+m_2}\)
  3. \(\left(m_1+m_2\right) / 2\)
  4. \(m_1 \times m_2\)

Answer: 4. \(m_1 \times m_2\)

2. Telescope

2. 1 Astronomical Telescope It is an optical instrument used to increase the visual angle of distant large objects such as a star a planet a cliff etc. An astronomical telescope consists of two converging lenses.

The one facing the object is called objective or field-lens and has large focal length and aperture. The distance between the two lenses is adjustable.

As a telescope is used to see distant objects, it object is between and 2F of the objective, and hence image formed by the objective is real, inverted, and diminished and is between F and 2F on the other side of it.

This image (called intermediate image) acts as an object for the eye-piece and shifting the position of the eyepiece is brought within its focus. So final image I, with respect to the intermediate image is erect, virtual, enlarged, and at a distance D from the eye.

This in turn implies that the final image with respect to the object is inverted, enlarged, and at a distance D from the eye.

Magnifying Power (MP)

Magnifying Power of a telescope is defined as

MP = \(\frac{\text { Visual angle with instrument }}{\text { Visual angle for unadded eye }}=\frac{\theta}{\theta_0}\)

But from the figure. \(\theta_0=\left(\frac{y}{f_0}\right) \text { and } \theta=\left(\frac{y}{-u_0}\right)\)

So MP \(=\frac{\theta}{\theta_0}=-\left[\frac{f_0}{u_e}\right]\) with length of tube

L = \(\left(\mathrm{f}_0+\mathrm{U}_e\right)\)……..(1)

(d1) If the final image is at infinity (far point) This situation is called normal adjustment as in this situation eye is least strained or relaxed. In this situation as for eye-piece v = ∞

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Astronomical Telescope

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-\infty}-\frac{1}{u_e}=\frac{1}{f_e} \quad \text { i.e., } \quad u_e=f_e\)

So, substituting this value of u e in equation (1) we have \(M P=-\left(\frac{f_0}{f_e}\right) \text { and } L=\left(f_0+f_e\right)\)

Usually, a telescope operates in this mode unless stated otherwise. In this mode, as ue is the maximum for a given telescope MP is the minimum while the length of the tube maximum.

(d2) If the final image is at D (near point)

In this situation as for eye-piece v = D

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-D}-\frac{1}{-u_e}=\frac{1}{f_e} \quad \text { i.e., } \quad \frac{1}{-u_e}=\frac{1}{f_e}\left[1+\frac{f_e}{D}\right]\)

So substituting this value of u e in Equation (1), we have \(M P=\frac{f_0}{f_e}\left[1+\frac{f_e}{D}\right] \text { with } L=f_0+\frac{f_e D}{f_e+D}\)…..(3)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Telescope If Object And Final Image Are Infinity

In this situation, ue is minimum so for a given telescope MP is maximum while the length of the tube is minimum and the eye is most strained. In the case of a telescope if the object and final image are at infinity and total light entering the telescope leaves it parallel to its axis as shown in the figure.

⇒ \(\frac{f_0}{f_e}=\frac{\text { Aperture of object }}{\text { Aperture of eyepiece }} \quad \text { i.e., } \quad M P=\frac{f_0}{f_e}=\frac{D}{d}\)……(4)

2.2 Terrestrial Telescope

Uses a third lens in between the objective and eyepieces so as to form the final image. This lens simply inverts the image formed by the objective without affecting the magnification.

Length of tube L = f0 + fe + 4f

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Terrestrial Telescope

2.3 Galileo’s Telescope

Convex lens as objective.

The concave lens is as eyepiece.

The field of view is much smaller

∴ eyepiece lens in concave.

(1) \(M=\frac{f_0}{f_e}\left[1-\frac{f_c}{v_e}\right]\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Galileos Telescope

(2) \(\mathrm{M}=\frac{\mathrm{f}_0}{\mathrm{f}_e}\)

Final image is at \(\alpha \quad L=f_0-f_0\)

(3) \(M=\frac{f_0}{f_e}\left[1-\frac{f_e}{D}\right]\)

The final image is at D. \(L=f_0-u_e\)

2.4 Binocular

In this telescope, as the intermediate image is outside the tube, the telescope cannot be used for making measurements. If two telescopes are mounted parallel to each other so that an object can be seen by both eyes simultaneously, the arrangement is called ‘binocular’

In a binocular, the length of each tube is reduced by using a set of totally reflecting prisms which provide an intense, erect image free from lateral inversion. Through a binocular, we get two images of the same object from different angles at the same time.

Their superposition gives the perception of depth also along with length and breadth, i.e., a binocular vision given a proper three-dimensional (3-D) image.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Binocular

Example 1. A telescope consists of two convex lenses of focal length 16 cm and 2 cm. What is the angular magnification of a telescope for a released eye? What is the separation between the lenses? If an object subtends an angle of 0.5º on the eye, what will be the angle subtended by its image?

Solution:

Angular magnification M = \(\frac{\alpha}{\beta}=\frac{F}{f}=\frac{16}{2}=8 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Separation between lenses = F + f = 16 + 2 = 18 cm

Here α = 0.5°

∴ Angular subtended by image β= M α = 8 x 0.5° = 4°

Example 2. The magnifying power of the telescope is found to be 9 and the separation between the lenses is 20 cm for related eye. What are the focal lengths of component lenses?

Solution:

Magnification M = \(\frac{F}{f}\)

Separation between lenses d = F + f

Given \(\frac{F}{f}\) = 9 i.e., F = 9f …..(1)

and F + f = 20 …..(2)

Putting the value of F from (1) in (2), we get 9f + f = 20 ⇒ 10 f = 20

⇒ \(\frac{20}{10}\) = 2cm

∴ F = 9f = 9 x 2 = 18 cm .

∴ F = 18 cm, f = 2 cm

Question 1. The magnifying power of a telescope can be increased by

  1. Increasing the focal length of the system
  2. Fitting eyepiece of high-power
  3. Fitting eyepiece of low-power
  4. Increasing the distance between objects

Answer: 2. Fitting eyepiece of high-power

Question 2. A simple telescope, consisting of an objective of focal length 60 cm and a single eye lens of focal length 5 cm is focussed on a distant object in such a way that parallel rays come out from the eye lens. If the object subtends an angle of 2° at the objective, the angular width of the image

  1. 10°
  2. 24°
  3. 50°
  4. 1/6°

Answer: 2. 24°

Question 3. If the telescope is reversed i.e., seen from the objective side

  1. The object will appear very small
  2. The object will appear very large
  3. There will be no effect on the image formed by the telescope
  4. The image will be slightly greater than the earlier one

Answer: 1. The object will appear very small

Question 4. The aperture of a telescope is made large, because

  1. To increase the intensity of the image
  2. To decrease the intensity of the image
  3. To have greater magnification
  4. To have a lesser resolution

Answer: 1. To increase the intensity of the image

Question 5. The magnifying power of a telescope is 9. When it is adjusted for parallel rays, the distance between the objective and the eye-piece is found to be 20 cm. The focal lengths of the two lenses are

  1. 18 cm, 2 cm
  2. 11 cm, 9 cm
  3. 10 cm, 10 cm
  4. 15 cm, 5 cm

Answer: 1. 18 cm, 2 cm

Question 6. A reflecting telescope utilizes

  1. A concave mirror
  2. A convex mirror
  3. A prism
  4. A plano-convex lens

Answer: 1. A concave mirror

Geometrical Optics NEET Physics Chapter 7 Study Material

3. Comparison Between Compound – Microscope And Astronomical-Telescope

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Comparision Between Compound Microscope And Astronomical Telescope

Scattering Of Light

When light from some source (ga, sun, stars) enters the earth’s atmosphere then it gets reflected in various directions by the particles of dust, smoke, and gas molecules. The phenomenon of this diffuse reflection is known as scattering. This was initially suggested by Tindal

According to Rayleigh, the intensity (I) of scattered light is inversely proportional to the fourth power of wavelength of light. i.e. λ

i.e. \(I \propto \frac{1}{\lambda^4}\)

That is the reason why red light (λ more) gets scattered minimum and violet light (λ less) gets scattered maximum (IR = 16IV)

(3) Consequences of scattering of light

  1. The appearance of the blue color of the sky.
  2. The danger signals are made red.
  3. The appearance of the black color of the sky in the absence of atmosphere.
  4. The appearance of the red color of the sun at sunrise and sunset.

Luminous bodies — The bodies which emit light themselves are known as luminous bodies.

Rainbow

  1. The seven-coloured curved strip formed as a result of dispersion of light through water droplets which keep suspended in the atmosphere after rains, is known as a rainbow.
  2. The rainbow is of two types –
    1. Primary rainbow
    2. Secondary rainbow

Difference between primary and secondary rainbow

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Difference Between Primary And Secondary Rainbow

Limit Of Resolution And Resolving Power Of Optical Instruments

  1. Resolving power 
    1. The ability of an optical instrument to produce separate diffraction patterns of two nearby objects is known as resolving power.
    2. The ability of an optical instrument to show two closely lying objects or spectral lines as separate is known as its resolving power.
  2. Limit of resolution – The reciprocal of resolving power is defined as the limit of resolution.
  3. Rayleigh’s limit of resolution – The distance between two object points, when the central maximum of the diffraction pattern of one coincides with the first minimum of the diffraction pattern of another, is defined as Rayleigh’s limit of resolution.

Resolving Power (R.P.) Of Telescope

R . P = \(\frac{a}{1.22 \lambda}=\frac{1}{\Delta \theta}=\frac{D}{d}\)

a = diameter of the aperture of the objective

λ = wavelength of light used

Δθ = Limit of resolution

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Resolving Power Of telescope

d = distance of two objects

D = distance of objects from the objective lens

The resolving power of an electron microscope is 4 x 103 times that of an ordinary microscope.

Resolving power (R.P.) of microscope

Rp = \(\frac{2 \mu \sin \theta}{1.22 \lambda}\)

μ = refractive index of the medium.

Solved Miscellaneous Problems

Problem 1. See the following figure. Which of the object(s) shown in the figure will not form its image in the mirror?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Not Form Its Image In the Mirror

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Reflecting Surface Of The Mirror

No ray from O3 is incident on the reflecting surface of the mirror, so its image is not formed.

Problem 2. The figure shows an object AB and a plane mirror MN placed parallel to the object. Indicate the mirror length required to see the image of the object if the observer’s eye is at E.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Mirror Length Required To See The Image Object

Solution:

Required length of Mirror = MN

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Required Length Of Mirror

∴ \(\triangle M N E \& \triangle A^{\prime} B^{\prime} E\) are similar

∴ \(\frac{M N}{O E}=\frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{\mathrm{C}^{\prime} \mathrm{E}} \Rightarrow \quad M N=\frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{2}=\frac{A B}{2}\)

Problem 3. An object is kept fixed in front of a plane mirror which is moved by 10 m/s away from the object, to find the velocity of the image.

Solution:

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{IM}}=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{OM}}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{I}, \mathrm{G}}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{M}, \mathrm{G}}=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{O}, \mathrm{G}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{M}, \mathrm{G}}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{M}, \mathrm{G}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{L}, \mathrm{G}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{O}, \mathrm{G}}}{2}\)

(because \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{O}, \mathrm{G}}=0 \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{I}, \mathrm{G}}}{2}=10 \hat{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{m}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Object is Kept Fixed In Front Of A Plane Mirror

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{I}, \mathrm{G}}=20 \hat{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}\)

Problem 4. Find the position of the final image after three successive reflections taking the first reflection on m1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Position Of Final Image After Three Successive Reflections taking First Relection

Solution:

1st reflection:

u = – 15cm

f = -10 cm

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}=\frac{-3+2}{30}=-\frac{1}{30}\)

v = – 30 cm

2nd reflection at the plane mirror:

u = 5 cm

v = – 5 cm

for 3rd reflection on curved mirror again: u = – 20 cm

v = \(\frac{u f}{u-f}=\frac{(-20) \times(-10)}{-20+10}=\frac{200}{-10}=-20 \mathrm{~cm}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Notes

Problem 5. A coin is placed 10 cm in front of a concave mirror. The mirror produces a real image that has a diameter of 4 times that of the coin. What is the image distance?

Solution:

m = \(\frac{d_2}{d_1}=-\frac{v}{u}\)

We have, u = 10 cm (virtual object) as the real image is formed

v = – mu = – 4 ×10 cm = – 40 cm

Problem 6. A small statue has a height of 1 cm and is placed in front of a spherical mirror. The image of the statue is inverted and is 0.5cm tall and located 10 cm in front of the mirror. Find the focal length and nature of the mirror.

Solution:

We have \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{\mathrm{~h}_1}=-\frac{0.5}{1}=-0.5\)

v = -10 cm (real image)

But m = \(\frac{f-v}{f}-0.5=\frac{f+10}{f} \quad \Rightarrow \quad f=\frac{-20}{3} \mathrm{~cm}\)

So, a concave mirror

Problem 8. A light ray deviates by 300 (which is one-third of the angle of incidence) when it gets refracted from a vacuum to a medium. Find the refractive index of the medium.

Solution:

δ = i – r \(\Rightarrow \quad \frac{\mathrm{i}}{3}=\mathrm{i}-\mathrm{r}=30^{\circ} . \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{i}=90^{\circ} \quad \Rightarrow \quad 2 \mathrm{i}=3 \mathrm{r}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refractive Index Of medium

∴ r = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{i}}{3}=60^{\circ}\)

So, \(\mu=\frac{\sin 90^{\circ}}{\sin 60^{\circ}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3 / 2}}=\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Problem 8. A coin lies on the bottom of a lake 2m deep at a horizontal distance x from the spotlight (a source of a thin parallel beam of light) situated 1 m above the surface of a liquid of refractive index μ= √2 and height 2m. Find x.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics A Coin Lies On The Bottom Of lake

Solution:

⇒ \(\sqrt{2}=\frac{\sin 45^{\circ}}{\sin r} \quad \Rightarrow \sin r=\frac{1}{2} \quad \Rightarrow \quad r=30^{\circ}\)

x = \(R Q+Q P=1 m+2 \tan 30^{\circ} \mathrm{m}=\left(1+\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}}\right) \mathrm{m} \text { Ans. }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Surface Of A Liquid Of Refractive Index

Problem 9. A ray of light falls at an angle of 30º onto a plane-parallel glass plate and leaves it parallel to the initial ray. The refractive index of the glass is 1.5. What is the thickness d of the plate if the distance between the rays is 3.82 cm?

(Given: \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{3}\right)=19.5^{\circ} ; \cos 19.5^{\circ}=0.94 ; \sin 10.5^{\circ}=0.18\))

Solution:

Using \(s=\frac{d \sin (i-r)}{\cos r} \quad \Rightarrow \quad d=\frac{3.82 \times \cos r}{\sin \left(30^{\circ}-r\right)}\)……(1)

Also, \(\quad 1.5=\frac{\sin 30^{\circ}}{\sin \mathrm{r}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \sin \mathrm{r}=\frac{1}{3}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ray Of Ligth Falss At An Angle Onto A Plane Parallel Glass Plate

so, \(r=19.5^{\circ}\)

So, \(d=\frac{3.82 \times \cos 19.5^{\circ}}{\sin \left(30^{\circ}-19.5^{\circ}\right)}=\frac{3.82 \times 0.94}{\sin 10.5^{\circ}}=\frac{3.82 \times 0.94}{0.18}=19.948 \mathrm{~cm} \approx 0.2 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Problem 10. Light passes through many parallel slabs one by one as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ligth Rays In Medium Are parallel

Prove that n1sini1, = n2sini2 = n3sini3 = n4sini4 = ……[Remember this]. Also, prove that if n1 = n4 then light rays in medium n1 and in medium n4 are parallel.

Solution:

We have, \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin i_2}=\frac{n_2}{n_1}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ligth Rays In Medium n1 And In Medium n4 Are Parallel

⇒ \(n_1 \sin i_1=n_2 \sin i_2\)…..(1)

Similarly \(n_2 \sin i_2=n_3 \sin i_3\) so on

so, \(\quad n_1 \sin i_1=n_2 \sin i_2=n_3 \sin i_3=\)

⇒ \(n_1 \sin i_1=n_4 \sin i_4 \Rightarrow \quad \sin i_1=\sin i_4\)

(\(n_1=n_2\))

so, \(i_1=i_4\)

Hence, light rays in medium n1 and in medium n4 are parallel.

Problem 11. An object lies 90 cm in the air above the water’s surface. It is viewed from the water nearly normally. Find the apparent height of the object

Solution:

d’ = \(\frac{d}{n_{r e 1}}=\frac{d}{n_i / n_r}=\frac{90 \mathrm{~cm}}{\frac{1}{4 / 3}}=\frac{90 \times 4}{3} \mathrm{~cm}=120 \mathrm{~cm} \text { Ans. }\)

Problem 12. Prove that the shift in position of object due to parallel slab is given by shift = \(\mathrm{d}\left(1-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{rcl}}}\right)\) where \(\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{rat}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{n}^{\prime}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ray Refraction At The First Surface

Solution:

Because of the ray refraction at the first surface, the image of O is formed at I1. For this refraction, the real depth is AO = x and the apparent depth is AI1

Thus: \(\mathrm{AI}_1=\frac{A O}{n_1 / n_r}=\frac{A O}{n^{\prime} / n}=\frac{n(A O)}{n^{\prime}}\)

The point \(\mathrm{I}_1\) acts as the object for the refraction of the second surface.

Due to this refraction, the image of \(\mathrm{I}_1\) is formed at \(\mathrm{I}_2\).

Thus, \(\mathrm{BI}_2=\frac{\left(B I_1\right)}{\left(n / n^{\prime}\right)}=\frac{n^{\prime}}{n}\left(B I_1\right)=n^{\prime} / n\left(A B+\mathrm{AI}_1\right)=\frac{n^{\prime}}{n}\left[d+\frac{n}{n^{\prime}}(A O)\right]=\frac{n^{\prime}}{n} d+A O\).

Net shift \(=\mathrm{OI}_2=\mathrm{BO}-\mathrm{BI}_2\)

= \(d+(A O)-\frac{n^{\prime}}{n} d-A O=d\left(1-\frac{n^0}{n}\right)=d \quad\left(1-\frac{1}{n_{\text {rel }}}\right)\) where \(n_{\text {rel }}=n_{\text {rel }}=\frac{n}{n^{\prime}}\).

Problem 13. Find the apparent depth of object O below surface AB, seen by an observer in the medium of refractive index μ2

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Observer In Medium Of Refractive Index

Solution:

∴ \(\mathrm{d}_{\text {esp. }}=\frac{\mathrm{t}_1}{\mu_1 / \mu_2}\)

Problem 14. In the above question, what is the depth of the object corresponding to incident rays striking on surface CD in medium μ2

Solution:

Depth of the object corresponding to incident ray striking on the surface CD in medium µ2 = t2

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Deapth Of The Object Corresponding To Incident Ray Stricking On The Surface

Problem 15. In the above question if the observer is in medium μ3, what is the apparent depth of the object seen below the surface CD?

Solution:

If the observer is in medium µ3. apparent depth below surface CD = QI2.

= \(\sum \frac{t_i}{\left(n_{\text {rel }}\right)_{\mathrm{i}}}=\frac{\mathrm{t}_2}{\mu_2 / \mu_3}+\frac{t_1}{\mu_1 / \mu_3}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Observer In Medium

Problem 16. Find the radius of the circle of illuminance, If a luminous object is placed at a distance of h from the interface in the denser medium.

Solution:

tan c = \(\frac{r}{h}\)

∴ r = h tan c

circle of illuminance

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Radius Of Circle Of Illuminance

But \(C=\sin ^{-1} \frac{1}{\left(\mu_d / \mu_r\right)} \quad \text { so, } \quad r=h \tan \left[\sin ^{-1} \frac{1}{\left(\mu_d / \mu_r\right)}\right]=h \cdot \frac{\mu_r}{\sqrt{\mu_d^2-\mu_r^2}}\)

Problem 17.  A ship is sailing in a river. An observer is situated at a depth of h in water (μw). If x >> h, find the angle made from the vertical, of the line of sight of the ship.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ship Is Sailing In River

Solution:

C = \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\mu_a}{\mu_w}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Made From Vertical Of Line Of Sight Of Ship

Problem 18. Find r, r´, e, δ for the case shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Of Refracted

Solution:

Here \(\theta=180^{\circ}-75^{\circ}=105^{\circ}\)

sin\(45^{\circ}=\sqrt{2} \sin r\)

∴ r = \(\sin ^{-1} \frac{1}{2}=30^{\circ}\)

r’ \(=180^{\circ}-(r+\theta)\)

= \(180^{\circ}-30^{\circ}-105^{\circ}=45^{\circ}\)

sin \(e=\sqrt{2} \sin r^{\prime}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Angle Of Refraction

∴ sin \(e=\sqrt{2} \times \sin 45^{\circ}=1\)

∴ e = \(90^{\circ}\)

So, \(\delta=\mathrm{i}+\mathrm{e}-\mathrm{A}=45^{\circ}+90^{\circ}-75^{\circ}=60^{\circ}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Notes

Problem 19. From the graph of angle of deviation δ versus angle of incidence i, find the prism angle

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Graph Of Angle Of Deviation Versus Angle Of Incidence

Solution:

From the graph

δ = i + e – A.

30° = 30° + 60° – A

A = 60°

use the result If i and e are interchanged then we get the same value of δ

Problem 20. Find the focal length of a plano-convex lens with R1 = 15 cm and R2 = ∞. The refractive index of the lens material n = 1.5.

Solution:

∴ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(\mathrm{n}-1)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right)=(1.5-1)\left(\frac{1}{15}-\frac{1}{\infty}\right)=0.5 \times \frac{1}{15}\)

∴ f = 30 cm

Problem 21. Find the focal length of a concavo-convex lens (positive meniscus) with R1 = 15 cm and R2 = 25 cm. The refractive index of the lens material n = 1.5.

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(1.5-1)\left(\frac{1}{15}-\frac{1}{25}\right)=0.5\left(\frac{10-6}{150}\right)\)

∴ f = \(\frac{300}{4}=75 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Problem 22. The figure shows a point object and a diverging lens. Find the final image formed.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Point Object And A Diverging Lens

Solution:

∴ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{-10}+\frac{1}{(-10)} \quad=-\frac{2}{10}=v=-5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Problem 23. Find the equivalent focal length of the system for paraxial rays parallel to the axis.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Equivalent Focal Length Of The System For Paraxial Rays

Solution:

∴ \(\frac{1}{f_{e q}}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}-\frac{d}{f_1 f_2}=\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{-10}-\frac{20}{10(-10)}=\frac{1}{5}\)

⇒ \(f_{o q}=5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Problem 24. See the figure Find the equivalent focal length of the combination shown in the figure and the position of the image.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Woreme Lens

Solution:

For the women lens \(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{-10}-\frac{1}{10}\right)=-\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2}{10}=\frac{1}{10}\)

Ago, Fm \(=\mathrm{R} / 2=\frac{10}{2}=5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{f_{e q}}=\frac{1}{F_m}-2 \frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{5}+2 \times \frac{1}{10}=\frac{2}{5}\)

∴ \(f_{\mathrm{eq}}=2.5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Questions and Answers

Question 1. The sky appears to be red in color at the time the sun sat. The reason is

  1. The blue color of sun rays is scattered away by the atmosphere
  2. As the sun emits only red color in the morning
  3. White light is made to appear red by the Atmosphere
  4. None of the above

Answer: 1. The Blue color of sun rays is scattered away by the atmosphere

Question 2. A light ray traveling in a glass medium is incident on the glass-air interface at an angle of incidence θ. The reflected (R ) and transmitted (T) intensities, both as a function of θ, are plotted. The correct sketch is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ligth Ray Traveeling In Glass medium Is Incident On Glass Air Interface

Answer: 3

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Ligth Rays Will be Total Internal Reflected

Initially, most of the parts will be transmitted.

When θ > ic, all the light rays will be total internal reflected.

So transmitted intensity = 0

So the correct answer is (3)

Question 3. The image of an object, formed by a plano-convex lens at a distance of 8 m behind the lens, is real and is one-third the size of the object. The wavelength of light inside the lens is 2/3 times the wavelength in free space. The radius of the curved surface of the lens is :

  1. 1 m
  2. 2 m
  3. 3 m
  4. 6 m

Answer: 3. 3 m

v = \(8 \mathrm{~m} \quad \text { (magnification }=-\frac{1}{3}=\frac{v}{u} \text { ) }\)

u = -24 m

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{\infty}+\frac{1}{R}\right)\)

R = 3m

Question 4. I is the image of a point object O formed by a spherical mirror, then which of the following statements is incorrect:

  1. If O and I are on the same side of the principal axis, then they have to be on opposite sides of the mirror.
  2. If O and I are on opposite sides of the principal axis, then they have to be on the same side of the mirror.
  3. If O and I are on opposite sides of the principal axis, then they can be on opposite sides of the mirror as well.
  4. If O is on the principal axis then I has to lie on the principal axis only.

Answer: 3. If O and I are on opposite sides of the principal axis, then they can be on opposite sides of the mirror as well.

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{O}}=-\frac{v}{u}\)

If O and I are on the same side of PA. \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{O}}\) will be positive which implies v and u will be of opposite signs.

Similarly, if O and I are on opp. sides, \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{O}}\) will be -ve which implies v and u will have the same sign.

If O is on PA, \(\mathrm{I}=\left(-\frac{v}{u}\right)(\mathrm{O})=0 \Rightarrow \mathrm{I}\) will also be on. P.A.

Question 5. The diamond shines because-

  1. It absorbs maximum light from the sun
  2. Of the nature of diamond
  3. Of total internal reflection
  4. Of refraction

Answer: 3. Of total internal reflection

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Notes

Question 6. A transparent cube contains a small air bubble. Its apparent distance is 2 cm when seen through one face and 5 cm when seen through another face. If the refractive index of the material of the cube is 1.5, the real length of the edge of the cube must be :

  1. 7 cm
  2. 7.5 cm
  3. 10.5 cm
  4. 3.5 cm

Answer: 3. 10.5 cm

Refractive index \((\mu)=\frac{\text { Real depth }}{\text { Apparent depth }}\)

Refractive index \((\mu)=1.5\)

Apparent depth \(=2+5=7 \mathrm{~cm}\)

So, 1.5 = \(\frac{\text { Real depth }}{7}\)

∴ Real depth \(=1.5 \times 7=10.5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 7. The maximum refractive index of a material, of a prism of apex angle 90°, for which light may be transmitted is:

  1. √3
  2. 1.5
  3. √2
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. √2

For transmission \(r_2 \leq \sin ^{-1}(1 / \mu)\) and \(r_1 \leq \sin ^{-1}(1 / \mu)\)

⇒ \(r_1+r_2 \quad \leq \quad 2 \sin ^{-1}(1 / \mu) \quad \mathrm{A} \leq 2 \sin ^{-1}(1 / \mu)\)

⇒ \(\sin ^{-1}(1 / \mu) \geq 45^{\circ} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\mu} \geq \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \Rightarrow \mu \leq \sqrt{2}\)

Question 8. The refractive index of the material of a prism is and its refracting angle is 30°. One of the refraction surfaces of the prism is made a mirror inwards. A beam of monochromatic light entering the prism from the other face will retrace its path after reflection from the mirrored surface if its angle of incidence on the prism is :

  1. 45°
  2. 60°
  3. 30°

Answer: 1. 45°

According to the given condition, the beam of light will retrace its path after reflection from BC.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Beam Of Ligth Will Retrace Its Path After Reflection

So \(\angle \mathrm{CPQ}=90^{\circ}\)

Thus, the angle of refraction at surface AC \(\angle \mathrm{PQN}=\angle \mathrm{r}=90^{\circ}-60^{\circ}=30^{\circ}\)

By Snell’s law \(\mu=\frac{\sin \mathrm{i}}{\sin \mathrm{r}} \Rightarrow \sqrt{2}=\frac{\sin \mathrm{i}}{\sin 30^{\circ}}\)

x \( \sin 30^{\circ}=\sin \mathrm{i} \Rightarrow =\sin \mathrm{i}\)

sin \(\mathrm{i}==\sin 45^{\circ}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{i}=45^{\circ}\)

Question 9. Prism of which material is used for the study of the infrared spectrum :

  1. Rock salt
  2. Flint glass
  3. Crown glass
  4. Quartz

Answer: 1. Rock salt

Rock salt prism is used for studying of infrared spectrum.

Question 10. The ray diagram could be correct

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics ray Diagram

  1. If n1 = n2 = ng
  2. If n1 = n2 and n1 < ng
  3. If n1 = n2 and n1 > ng
  4. Under no circumstances

Answer: 3. If a, = n2 and a, > n

Question 11. A biconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is in front of a plane mirror. The distance between the lens and the mirror is 10 cm. A small object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from the lens. The final image is

  1. Virtual and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror
  2. Real and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror
  3. Virtual and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror
  4. Real and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror

Answer: 2. Real and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror

First image, \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{-30}=\frac{1}{15}\)

v = 30, the image in formed 20 cm behind the mirror.

The second image, by a plane mirror, will be 20 cm in front of the plane mirror.

For third image \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{10}=\frac{1}{15}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{15}=\frac{3+2}{30}=\frac{5}{30}\)

v = 6 cm

Question 12. A far-sighted man who has lost his spectacles reads a book by looking through a small hole (3-4 mm) in a sheet of paper, The reason will be

  1. Because the hole produces an image of the letters at a longer distance
  2. Because in doing so, the focal length of the eye lens is effectively increased
  3. Because in doing so, the focal length of the eye lens is effectively decreased
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Because in doing so, the focal length of the eye lens is effectively decreased

Question 13. If in a compound microscope, m1 and m2 is the linear magnification of the objective lens and eye lens respectively, then the magnifying power of the compound microscope will be

  1. \(m_1-m_2\)
  2. \(\sqrt{m_1+m_2}\)
  3. \(\left(m_1+m_2\right) / 2\)
  4. \(m_1 \times m_2\)

Answer: 4. \(m_1 \times m_2\)

Magnification of a compound microscope is given by \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{v_0}{u_0} \times \frac{D}{u_c} \Rightarrow|\mathrm{m}|=\mathrm{m}_0 \times \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}\)

Question 14. A telescope has an objective lens of 10 cm diameter and is situated at a distance of one kilometer from two objects. The minimum distance between these two objects, which can be resolved by the telescope, when the mean wavelength of light is 5000 Å, of the order of :

  1. 0.5 m
  2. 5 m
  3. 5 mm
  4. 5 cm

Answer: 3. 5 mm

Resolving limit of telescope is

θ \( \propto \frac{x}{D}=\frac{\lambda}{d}\)

x = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)

Given, \(\lambda=5000\) Å = \(5000 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\),

D = \(1 \mathrm{~km}=1000 \mathrm{~m}\)

d = \(10 \mathrm{~cm}=0.1 \mathrm{~m}\)

Hence, \(x=\frac{5000 \times 10^{-10} \times 1000}{0.1}\)

= \(5 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}\)

= \(5 \mathrm{~mm}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Notes

Question 15. The angular resolution of a 10 cm diameter telescope at a wavelength of 5000 A is of the order of :

  1. 108 rad
  2. 10-2 rad
  3. 10-4 rad
  4. 10-6 rad

Answer: 4. 10-6 rad

Angular resolution = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{\mathrm{d}}\)

= \(\frac{1.22 \times 5000 \times 10^{-10}}{10 \times 10^{-2}}\)

= \(6.1 \times 10^{-6}\)

\(10^{-6} \mathrm{rad}\)

Question 16. A ray of light traveling in air is incident on a medium of refractive index μ. If the angle of refraction is twice the incident angle, the incident angle is

  1. \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)
  2. \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{2 \mu}\right)\)
  3. \(\cos ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)
  4. \(\cos ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{2 \mu}\right)\)

Answer: 4. \(\cos ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{2 \mu}\right)\)

Using Snell’s law,

sini = μ sin 2i

sini = 2 μ sini cosi

i = \(\cos ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{2 \mu}\right)\)

However, the given data are not appropriate since when light ray goes from rarer to denser medium then light moves towards the normal.

Question 17. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a transparent block of height 10 mm and a refractive index of 2.72. It is immersed in a lower refractive index liquid as shown in the figure. It is found that the light emerging from the block to the liquid forms a circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm on the top of the block. The refractive index of the liquid is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Refractive Index Of The Liquid

  1. 1.21
  2. 1.30
  3. 1.36
  4. 1.42

Answer: 3. 1.36

Sin \(\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{c}}=\frac{r}{\sqrt{r^2+h^2}} \Rightarrow \frac{n_f}{n_B}=\frac{r}{\sqrt{r^2+h^2}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 7 Geometrical Optics Square Angle Of Refraction

= \(\frac{r}{\sqrt{r^2+h^2}} \times 2.72=\frac{5.77}{11.54} \times 2.72=1.36\)

Question 18. An experiment is performed to find the refractive index of glass using a traveling microscope. In this experiment distances are measured by –

  1. A standard laboratory scale
  2. A meter scale provided on the microscope
  3. A screw gauge provided on the microscope
  4. A vernier scale provided on the microscope

Answer: 4. A vernier scale provided on the microscope

A traveling microscope moves horizontally on a main scale provided with a vernier scale, provided with the microscope

 

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes For Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction

1. Magnetic Flux

The concept of magnetic lines of force was first proposed by Faraday. Faraday tried to provide the lines of force a real form assuming them as stretched rubber bands.

  • In modern physics, the concept of magnetic lines of force is used in visualization or explanation of principles only.
  • The tangent drawn at any point on a line of force in a magnetic field shows the direction of the magnetic field at that point and the density of lines of force, i.e., the number of lines of force crossing normally a unit area indicates the intensity of the magnetic field.
  • The lines of force in a uniform magnetic field are parallel straight lines equidistant from each other.
  • Where the lines of force are near each other, B is higher and where the lines of force are far apart, B is lesser.
  • The number of lines of force crossing a given surface is called flux from that surface.
  • Suppose it is generally represented by Φ. Flux is a property of a vector field. If the vector field is a magnetic field, then the flux is called magnetic flux.

Electromagnetic Induction Notes for NEET Physics Class 12

The magnetic flux crossing a certain area is equal to the scalar product of the vector field \((\vec{B})\) and the vector area \((\overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}})\), that is

Magnetic flux \(\mathrm{d} \phi=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}=\mathrm{BdA} \cos \theta\)

where θ is the angle between the vector field \((\vec{B})\) and the vector area \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}\).

Φ = ∫ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}\)

For a uniform magnetic field \((\vec{B})\) and plane surface \((\vec{A})\) = \((\vec{B})\).\((\vec{A})\) = BA cosθ

(Note: In real sense, area is a scalar quantity, but it can be treated as whose direction is in the direction of perpendicular pointing outward from the surface)

Magnetic flux is a scalar quantity.

If a plane surface of area A is imagined in a uniform magnetic field \((\vec{B})\), then

(1)when a surface is perpendicular to the magnetic field, the lines of force crossing that area, i.e., the magnetic flux is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Surface Is Perpendicular To The Magnetic Field

Φ= BA because θ = 0, cos θ = 1

(2) If the surface is parallel to the field, then

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Surface Is Parallel To The Field

Electromagnetic Induction Notes for NEET Physics Class 12

θ = 90°, cos θ = 0

∴ Φ= BA cos 90 = 0

(3) when the normal to the surface makes an angle θ with the magnetic field, the magnetic flux is Φ = BA cosθ

Suppose the magnetic field is not uniform and the surface is in no plane. In that case, the element \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}\) of the surface may be assumed as plane and magnetic field \((\vec{B})\) may also be assumed as uniform over his element.

Thus the magnetic flux coming out from this element is \(\mathrm{d} \phi=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}\)

Hence magnetic flux coming out from the entire surface \(\phi=\int_s \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d A}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnetic Flux Coming Out From Entire Surface

For a closed surface the vector area element pointing outward is positive and the vector area element pointing inward is negative.

Magnetic lines of force are closed curves because free magnetic poles do not exist. Thus for a closed surface whatever the number of lines of force entering it, the same number of lines of force come out from it.

As a result for a closed curve \(\phi=\int_{\mathrm{s}} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dA}}=0 \text { or } \quad \nabla \cdot \vec{B}=0\)

Thus the net magnetic flux coming out of a closed surface is equal to zero.

For a normal plane surface in a magnetic field

Φ= BA

Hence B = \(\frac{\phi}{\mathrm{A}}\)

Thus the magnetic flux passing through normally from the surface of a unit is equal to magnetic induction B.

Therefore \(\frac{\phi}{\mathrm{A}}\) is also called flux density.

Unit Of Magnetic Flux – In the M.K.S. system the unit of magnetic flux is Weber (Wb) and in the C.G.S. system, the unit of magnetic flux is Maxwell.

1 weber = 108 maxwell

The M.K.S unit of flux density or magnetic induction is Weber/m2. It is also called tesla.

1 tesla = 1 weber/m2

The C.G.S unit of magnetic flux density is gauss.

1 gauss = 1 maxwell/cm8

1 tesla = 1 weber/m2 = 104 gauss

Dimensions Of Magnetic Flux: Φ = BA

∴ \([\phi]=\frac{N}{A-m} \times m^2=\frac{N-m}{A}=\frac{\left(kg-m-s^2\right) \times m}{A}\)

= \(k g-m^2-s^2-A-1 \quad=M^1 L^2 T-2 A-1\)

1. Magnetic Flux Solved Examples

Example 1. The plane of a coil of area 1m2 and having 50 turns is perpendicular to a magnetic field of 3 x 10-5 weber/m2. The magnetic flux linked with it will be

  1. 1.5 x 10-3 weber
  2. 3 x 10-5 weber
  3. 15 x 10-5 weber
  4. 150 weber

Solution:

Φ = NBA cosθ

but N = 50, B = 3 x 10-5 wb/m2,

A = 1m2, θ = 0 or Φ = NBA

= 50 × 3 ×10-5× 1

= 150 × 10-5 weber

∴ Answer will be (1)

Example 2. Consider the fig. A uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T is directed along the +x axis. Then what is the magnetic flux through the top surface of the figure?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Uniform Magnetic Field Directed Along X Axis

  1. Zero
  2. 0.8 Wb
  3. 1.0m Wb
  4. -1.8m Wb

Solution:

The magnetic flux is Φ = BA cosθ

for the top surface, the angle between normal to the surface and the x-axis is θ = 60°, and B = 0.2 T, A = 10 x 10 x 10-4 m2

Thus Φ = 0.2 x 10-2 x cos (60)= 10-3 Wb.

The correct answer is thus (3)

NEET Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Study Notes

1.1 Faraday’s Laws Of Electromagnetic Induction

When magnetic flux passing through a loop changes with time or magnetic lines of force are cut by a conducting wire then an emf is produced in the loop or in that wire. This emf is called induced emf.

If the circuit is closed then the current will be called induced current.

magnetic flux = \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)

The magnitude of induced emf is equal to the rate of change of flux w.r.t. time in the case of a loop.

In the case of a wire, it is equal to the rate at which magnetic lines of force are cut by a wire

E = \(-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

(–) the sign indicates that the emf will be induced in such a way that it will oppose the change of flux.SI unit of magnetic flux = Weber.

1.1 Faraday’s Laws Of Electromagnetic Induction Solved Examples

Example 1. A coil is placed in a constant magnetic field. The magnetic field is parallel to the plane of the coil as shown in the figure. Find the emf induced in the coil.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Coil Is Placed In A Constant Magnetic Field

Solution:

Φ = 0 (always) since the area is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

∴ emf = 0

Example 2. Find the emf induced in the coil shown in the figure. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the coil and is constant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnetic Field Is Prependicular To The Plane Of The Coil And Is Constant

Solution:

Φ = BA (always) = const.

∴ emf = 0

Example 3. Find the direction of the induced current in the coil shown in the figure. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the coil and it is increasing with time.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Direction Of Induced Current In The Coil

Solution:

Inward flux is increasing with time. To oppose it, an outward magnetic field should be induced.

Hence current will flow anticlockwise.

Example 4. Shows a coil placed in a decreasing magnetic field applied perpendicular to the plane of the coil. The magnetic field is decreasing at a rate of 10T/s. Find out the current in magnitude and direction

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Coil Placed In Decreasing Magnetic Field Applied Perpendicular To The Plane Of Coil

Solution: Φ = B.A

emf = A . \(\frac{\mathrm{d B}}{\mathrm {d t}}\) = 2 x 10 = 20 v

∴ i = 20/ 5 = 4 amp.

From Lenz’s law, the direction of the current will be anticlockwise.

Example 5. Figure shows a long current carrying wire and two rectangular loops moving with velocity v. Find the direction of current in each loop.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Long Current Carrying Wire And Two Rectangular Loops Moving With Velocity

Solution:

In loop (1) no emf will be induced because there is no flux change.

In loop (2) emf will be induced because the coil is moving in a region of decreasing magnetic field inward in direction.

Therefore to oppose the flux decrease in inward direction, current will be induced such that its magnetic field will be inwards. For this direction the current should be clockwise.

2. Lenz’s Law (Conservation Of Energy Principle)

According to this law, emf will be induced in such a way that it will oppose the cause which has produced it. The figure shows a magnet approaching a ring with its north pole towards the ring.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Lenzs Law Conservation Of Energy Principal

We know that magnetic field lines come out of the north pole and magnetic field intensity decreases as we move away from the magnet. So the magnetic flux (here towards left) will increase with the approach of the magnet.

This is the cause of flux change. To oppose it, the induced magnetic field will be towards the right. For this, the current must be anticlockwise as seen by the magnet.

If we consider the approach of the North Pole to be the cause of flux change, Lenz’s law suggests that the side of the coil towards the magnet will behave as the North Pole and will repel the magnet.

We know that a current-carrying coil will behave like a North Pole if it flows anticlockwise. Thus as seen by the magnet, the current will be anticlockwise.

If we consider the approach of the magnet as the cause of the flux change, Lenz’s law suggests that a force opposite to the motion of the magnet will act on the magnet, whatever the mechanism.

Lenz’s law says that if the coil is set free, it will move away from the magnet because in doing so it will oppose the ‘approach’ of the magnet.

If the magnet is given some initial velocity towards the coil and is released, it will slow down. It can be explained as the following.

The current induced in the coil will produce heat. From energy conservation, if heat is produced there must be an equal decrease of energy in some other form, here it is the kinetic energy of the moving magnet.

Thus the magnet must slow down. So we can justify that Lenz’s law is the conservation of energy principle.

Class 12 NEET Electromagnetic Induction Notes

2.1 Induced Emf, Current And Change In A Circuit

If e.m.f induced in a circuit is E and the rate of change of magnetic flux is dΦ/dt, then from Faraday’s and Lenz’s law

E \(\propto-\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\) or \(\mathrm{E}=-\mathrm{K}\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\) where K is constant, equal to one.

Thus \(E=-\left(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\right)\)

If there are \(\mathrm{N}\) turns in the coil, then induced e.m.f will be

E = \(-N\left(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\right)\)

If the magnetic flux linked with the circuit changes from \(\phi_1 \quad to \quad \phi_2\), in time t, then induced e.m.f will be

E = \(-N\left(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\right)=-N\left(\frac{\phi_2-\phi_1}{\mathrm{t}}\right)\)

If the resistance of the circuit is R, then the current induced in the circuit will be

I = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{R}}=-\frac{\mathrm{N}\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{t R} \text { ampere } \quad=-\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\right) \text { ampere }\)

Induced current depends upon

  1. The resistance of the circuit \(\mathrm{I} \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
  2. The rate of change of magnetic flux \(\mathrm{I} \propto\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\)
  3. The number of turns \((\mathrm{N}) ; \mathrm{I} \propto \mathrm{N}\)

If R = ∞, that is, the circuit is open, then the current will not flow and if the circuit is closed, then the current will flow in the circuit.

If change dq flows in the circuit in time dt, then the induced current will be

I = \(\left(\frac{d q}{d t}\right)\) or dq = I dt but \(I=\frac{1}{R}\left(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\right)\)

∴ dq = \(\frac{1}{R}\left(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\right) d t=\frac{1}{R} d \phi\) or \(q=\int \frac{d \phi}{R}=\frac{\phi_2-\phi_1}{R}\)

If N is the number of turns, then \(\mathrm{dq}=\frac{\mathrm{Nd} \phi}{R}, \mathrm{q}=\frac{\mathrm{N}\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{R}\)

The charge flowing due to induction does not depend upon the time but depends upon the total change in the magnetic flux. It does not depend upon the rate or time interval of the change in magnetic flux.

Whether the change in magnetic flux is rapid or slow, the charge induced in the circuit will remain the same.

Thus \(\mathrm{q} \propto \mathrm{d} \phi \text { or } \mathrm{q} \propto\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)\)

The induced charge depends upon the resistance of the circuit, i.e., q ∝ 1/R

If R = ∞ or the circuit is open, q = 0 that is charge will not flow in the circuit.

If R≠ ∞ or circuit is closed, then q ≠ 0, that is, the induced charge will flow in the circuit The e.m.f induced in the circuit does not depend upon the resistance of the circuit.

The e.m.f induced in the circuit depends upon the following factors –

  1. Number of turns (N) in the coil,
  2. Rate of change of magnetic flux,
  3. Relative motion between the magnet and the coil,
  4. The cross-sectional area of the coil,
  5. The magnetic permeability of the magnetic substance or material placed inside the coil.

2.2 Fleming’s Right Hand Rule

This law is used for finding the direction of the induced e.m.f or current.

According to this law, if we stretch the right-hand thumb and two nearby fingers perpendicular to one another and the first finger points in the direction of the magnetic field and the thumb in the direction of motion of the conductor then the central finger will point in the direction of the induced current.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Flemings Right Hand Rule

2.3 Direction Of Induced Emf And Current (Applications Of Lenz’s Law)

If the current flowing in a coil appears anti-clockwise, then that plane of the coil will behave like an N-pole.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Flowing In A Coil Appears Anti Clockwise Then That Plane Of Coil Will Behave N Pole

If the current flowing in the coil appears clockwise, then that plane of the coil will behave like a S-pole.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Flowing In A Coil Appears Clockwise Then That Plane Of Coil Will Behave S Pole

NEET Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Study Notes

If the north pole of a magnet is moved rapidly towards the coil, then according to Lenz’s law the induced current will flow in the coil in such a direction as to oppose the motion of the magnetic happen only when the face of the coil towards the magnet behaves as a north pole, that is, the induced current will appear flowing in an anti-clockwise direction as seen from the side of the magnet.

Thus a force of repulsion will be produced between the magnet and the coil coming near each other which will oppose the motion of the magnet.

Hence some mechanical work has to be done to move the magnet near the coil against this opposing force and this work (mechanical energy) is converted into current (electrical energy)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Northpole Of Magnetic Is Moved Rapidly Towards Coil

On bringing a south pole towards a coil the current induced in the coil will appear to flow in a clockwise direction as observed from the side of the magnet and the face of the coil towards the magnet will behave as a south pole.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction On Moving The North Pole Of A Magnet Away From The Coil The Current Induced In The Coil Will Appear Flowing Clockwise Direction

On moving the north pole of a magnet away from the coil the current induced in the coil will appear to flow in the clockwise direction as seen from the side of the magnet and the face of the coil towards the magnet will behave as a south pole.

 

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction South Pole Towards A Coil The Current Induced In The Coil Will Appear Flowing Clockwise Direction

On moving the south pole of a magnet away from the coil the current induced in the coil will appear to flow in the anticlockwise direction as seen from the side of the magnet and the face of the coil towards the magnet will behave like a north pole.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction On Moving The South Pole Of A Magnet Away From The Coil The Current Induced In The Coil Will Appear Flowing In Anticlockwise Direction

If a magnet is allowed to drop freely through a copper coil, then an induced current will be produced in the coil. This current will oppose the motion of the magnet, as a result, the acceleration of the falling magnet due to gravity will be less than ‘g’.

If the coil is cut somewhere, then the emf will be induced in the coil only but current will not be induced. In the absence of induced current the coil will not oppose the motion of the magnet and the magnet will fall through the coil with the acceleration equal to g.

If a magnet is dropped freely in a hollow long metal cylinder, then the acceleration of the falling magnet will be less than gravitational acceleration.

As the magnet keeps on falling inside a tube, its acceleration will continue to decrease and after traversing a certain distance the acceleration will become zero. Now the magnet will fall with constant velocity. This constant velocity is called terminal velocity.

If a current-carrying coil is brought near another stationary coil, then the direction of induced current in the second coil will be in the direction of current in the moving coil.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction If A Current Carrying Coil Is Brought Near Another Stationary Coil

If a current-carrying coil is taken away from a stationary coil, then the direction of induced current in the second coil will be opposite to the direction of current in the moving coil.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction If A Current Carrying Coil Is Taken Away From A Stationary Coil

In the coils arranged in the following way, when the key K connected to the circuit of the primary coil, is pressed, an induced current is produced in the secondary coil.

The direction of the induced current in the secondary coil is opposite to the direction of the current in the primary coil. (From Lenz’s law) When the key is opened, then the current in the primary coil is reduced to zero but current is induced in the secondary coil.

The direction of this induced current is the same as the direction of the current in the primary coil. (Form Lenz’s law).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Direction Of This Induced Current IS Same As The Direction Of Current In The Primary Coil

When current is passed through a coil, the current flowing through the coil changes. As a result, the magnetic flux linked with the coil changes. Due to this, a current is induced in the coil. If the current induced in the coil flows in the opposite direction of the applied current.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Flowing In The Coil Is Decreased

If the current flowing in the coil is decreased, then the current induced in the coil flows in the direction of the applied current so as to oppose the decrement of the applied current.

Two coils A and B are arranged as shown in the figure. On pressing the key K current flows through coil A in the clockwise direction and the current induced in coil B will flow in the anticlockwise direction. (From Lenz’s law)NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Current Induced In The Coil B Will Flow In The Clockwise Direction

On opening the key K the current flowing through coil A will go on decreasing. Thus the current induced in coil B will flow in the clockwise direction.

If current flows in a straight conductor from A to B as shown in the figure, then the direction of current induced in the loop placed near it will be clockwise. (From Lenz’s law).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Direction Of Current Induced In The Loop Placed Near It Will Be Clockwise

Three identical circular coils A, B and C are arranged coaxially as shown in the figure. The coils A and C carry equal currents as shown. Coils B and C are fixed in position.

If coil A is moved towards B, then the current induced in coil B will be in a clockwise direction because the direction of the current induced in coil B will oppose the motion of coil A.

(The face of A towards B is the south pole, then the face of B towards A is the south pole). There is no relative motion between B and C so current will not be induced in coil B due to coil C.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Three Identical Circular Coils ABC Are Arranged Coaxially

3. Motional Emf

We can find emf induced in a moving rod by considering the number of lines cut by it per sec assuming there are ‘B’ lines per unit area. Thus when a rod of length l moves with velocity v in a magnetic field B, as shown, it will sweep area per unit time equal to Iv and hence it will cut B l v lines per unit time.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction emf Induced Between The Ends Of The Rod

Hence emf induced between the ends of the rod = Bvl

Also emf= \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\).

Here Φ denotes flux passing through the area, swept by the rod. The rod sweeps an area equal to A/dt in time interval dt. Flux through this area = BA/dt.

Thus \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} \ell \mathrm{vdt}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{Bv} \ell\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rod Is Moving It Will Sweep Area Per Unit Time

If the rod is moving as shown in the following figure, it will sweep area per unit time = v l sinθ and hence it will cut B v l sinθ lines per unit time.

Thus emf = Bvl sinθ.

3.1 Explanation Of Emf Induced In Rod On The Basis Of Magnetic Force

If a rod is moving with velocity v in a magnetic field B,  as shown, the free electrons in a rod will experience a magnetic force in a downward direction and hence free electrons will accumulate at the lower end and there will be a deficiency of free electrons and hence a surplus of positive charge at the upper end.

These charges at the ends will produce an electric field in a downward direction which will exert an upward force on the electron.

If the rod has been moving for quite some time enough charges will accumulate at the ends so that the two forces qE and qvB will balance each other. Thus E = v B.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Induced In Rod On The Basis Of Magnetic Force

VP – VQ= V B l

The moving rod is equivalent to the following diagram, electrically.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Moving Rod Is Equivalent

Shows a closed coil ABCA moving in a uniform magnetic field B with a velocity v. The flux passing through the coil is a constant and therefore the induced emf is zero.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Flux Passing Through The Coil Is A Consant And Induced emf Is Zero

Now consider rod AB, which is a part of the coil. Emf induced in the rod =B L v

Suppose the emf induced in part ACB is E, as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction emf Induced In Part ACB IS E

Since the emf in the coil is zero, Emf (in ACB) + Emf (in BA) = 0

or -E + vBL = 0 or E = vBL

Thus emf induced in any path joining A and B is the same, provided the magnetic field is uniform. Also, the equivalent emf between A and B is BLv (here the two emf’s are in parallel)

3.1 Explanation Of Emf Induced In Rod On The Basis Of Magnetic Force Solved Examples

Example 1. Find the emf induced in the rod in the following cases. The figures are self-explanatory.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Induced In The Rod Following Cases

Solution:

(1)here \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \| \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \text { so } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=0\)

emf = \(\vec{\ell} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})=0\)

(2)here \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \| \vec{\ell}\)

so emf = \(\vec{\ell} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})=0\)

(3)here \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \| \vec{\ell}\)

so emf = \(\vec{\ell} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})=0\)

Example 2. A circular coil of radius R is moving in a magnetic field B with a velocity v as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Circular Coil Of Radius R Is Moving In A Magentic Field B With Velocity V

Find the emf across the diametrically opposite points A and B.

Solution: emf = BVIeffective = 2 R v B

Example 3. An irregularly shaped wire AB moving with velocity v, as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Irregular Shaped Wire AB Moving With Velocity V

Find the emf induced in the wire.

Solution:

The same emf will be induced in the straight imaginary wire joining A and B, which is Bvl sin θ

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Will Be Induced In The Straight Imaginary Wire Joining A And B

Example 4. A rod of length l is kept parallel to a long wire carrying constant current i. It is moving away from the wire with a velocity v. Find the emf induced in the wire when its distance from the long wire is x.

Solution:

E = \(\mathrm{B} l \mathrm{~V}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i} l \mathrm{~V}}{2 \pi \mathrm{x}}\)

Or,

Emf is equal to the rate at which magnetic field lines are cut. In dt time the area swept by the rod is l v dt. the magnetic field lines cut in dt time = \(B l v d t=\frac{\mu_0 i l v d t}{2 \pi x} \text {. }\)

∴ The rate with which magnetic field lines are cut = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i} / \mathrm{v}}{2 \pi \mathrm{x}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Rod Of Length I Is Kept Parallel To A Long Wire

Example 5. A rod of length l is placed perpendicular to a long wire carrying current i. The rod is moved parallel to the wire with a velocity v. Find the emf induced in the rod if its nearest end is at a distance ‘a’ from the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Rod Of Length I Is Placed Perpendicular To A Long Wire Carrying Current I

Solution:

Consider a segment of rod of length dx, at a distance x from the wire. Emf induced in the segment

d \(\in=\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi x} d x. v\)

∴ \(\epsilon=\int_a^{a+\ell} \frac{\mu_0 i v d x}{2 \pi x}=\frac{\mu_0 i v}{2 \pi} \ln \left(\frac{\ell+a}{a}\right)\)

Example 6. A rectangular loop is moving parallel to a long wire carrying current I with a velocity v. Find the emf induced in the loop if its nearest end is at a distance ‘a’ from the wire. Draw an equivalent electrical diagram.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Rectangular loop Is Moving Parallel To A Long Wire Carrying Current I With A Velocity V

Solution:

emf = 0.

e = \(\frac{\mu_0 i v}{2 \pi} \ell \mathrm{n}\left(\frac{a+b}{a}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Equivalent Elecrical

∴ \(V_Q-V_R=e, \quad V_P-V_s=e \quad \Rightarrow \quad i=\frac{e-e}{4 r}=0\)

4. Induced Emf Due To Rotation

4.1 Rotation Of The Rod

Consider a conducting rod of length l rotating in a uniform magnetic field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Conducting Rod Of Length I Rotatng In A Uniform Magnetic Field

Emf induced in a small segment of length dr, of the rod = v B dr = rω B dr

∴ emf induced in the rod = \(\omega \mathrm{B} \int_0^1 \mathrm{rdr}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~B} \omega \mathrm{l}^2\)

the equivalent of this rod is as follows

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Induced In The Rod

or \(\varepsilon=\frac{\mathrm{d} \Phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

∴ \(\varepsilon=\frac{\mathrm{d} \Phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\text { flux through the area swept by the rod in time } \mathrm{dt}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} \frac{1}{2} \ell^2 \omega \mathrm{dt}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~B} \omega \ell^2\)

4.1 Rotation Of The Rod Solved Examples

Example 1. A rod PQ of length l is rotating about one end P in a uniform magnetic field B which is perpendicular to the plane of rotation of the rod. Point M is the midpoint of the rod. Find the induced emf between M and Q if that between P and Q = 100V.NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Induced EMF Between M And Q Between P And Q

Solution:

⇒ \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{MO}}+\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{PM}}=\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{PQ}}\)

⇒ corner \(\rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{Bw} \ell^2}{2}=100\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{MO}}+\frac{\mathrm{B} \omega\left(\frac{\ell}{2}\right)^2}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{B} \omega \ell^2}{2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{MO}}=\frac{3}{8} \mathrm{~B} \omega \ell^2=\frac{3}{4} \times 100 \mathrm{~V}=75 \mathrm{~V}\)

Example 2. A rod of length L and resistance r rotates about one end as shown in the figure. Its other end touches a conducting ring of negligible resistance. A resistance R is connected between the centre and the periphery. Draw the electrical equivalence and find the current in the resistance R. There is a uniform magnetic field B directed as shown.

 NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Rod Of Length L And Resistance R Roates About One End

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Uniform Magnetic Field B Directed

currenti = \(\frac{\frac{1}{2} B \omega \ell^2}{R+r}\)

Example 3. In the above question find the force required to move the rod with constant velocity v, and also find the power delivered by the external agent.

Solution: The force needed to keep the velocity constant \(F_{\text {ext }}=i \ell B=\frac{B^2 \ell^2 v}{R+r}\)

Power due to external force \(=\frac{B^2 \ell^2 v^2}{R+r}=\frac{\varepsilon^2}{R+r}=i^2(R+r)\)

Note: that the power delivered by the external agent is converted into joule heating in the circuit. That means the magnetic field helps in converting the mechanical energy into joule heating.

Example 4. A rod PQ of mass m and resistance r is moving on two fixed, resistanceless, smooth conducting rails (closed on both sides by resistances R1 and R2). Find the current in the rod at the instant its velocity is v.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Rod PQ Of Mass And Resistance Is Moving On Two Fixed Resistanceless Smooth Conducting Rails

Solution:

i = \(\frac{B \ell V}{r+\frac{R_1 R_2}{R_1+R_2}}\)

this circuit is equivalent to the following diagram.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current In The Rod At Instant Its Velocity

Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 NEET Notes

4.2. Emf Induced Due To Rotation Of A Coil Solved Examples

Example 1. A ring rotates with angular velocity ra about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the ring passing through the centre of the ring. A constant magnetic field B exists parallel to the axis. Find the emf induced in the ring

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Induced Due To Rotational Of A Coil

Solution:

Flux passing through the ring Φ = B. A is a constant here, therefore emf induced in the coil is zero. Every point of this ring is at the same potential, by symmetry.

4.3 Emf Induced In A Rotating Disc

Consider a disc of radius r rotating in a magnetic field B.

Consider an element dx at a distance x from the centre. This element is moving with speed v =ωx.

∴ Induced emf across dx = B(dx) v = Bdxωx = Bωxdx

∴ emf between the centre and the edge of the disc.

= \(\int_0^{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{B} \omega \mathrm{xd} d x=\frac{\mathrm{B} \omega \mathrm{r}^2}{2}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Induced In A Rotating Disc

4.4. Rotation Of A Rectangular Coil In A Uniform Magnetic Field

If the figure is a conducting rectangular coil of area A and turns N is shown. It is rotated in a uniform magnetic field B about a horizontal axis perpendicular to the field with an angular velocity ω. The magnetic flux linked with the coil is continuously changing due to rotation.

θ is the angle between the perpendicular to the plane of the coil and the direction of the magnetic field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rotation Of A Rectangular Coil In A Uniform Magnetic Fiedl

The magnetic flux passing through the rectangular coil depends upon the orientation of the plane of the coil about its axis.

Magnetic flux passing through the coil \(\phi=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=\mathrm{BA} \quad \cos \theta=\mathrm{BA} \quad \cos \quad \omega \mathrm{t}\)

If there are N turns in the coil, then the flux linked with the coil Φ = BAN cosωt

Since Φ depends upon the time t, the rate of change of magnetic flux \(\frac{d \phi}{d t}=-B A N \omega \sin \omega t\)

According to Faraday’s law, the emf induced in the coil \(\epsilon=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

or \(\epsilon=\text{BAN} \omega \sin \omega \mathrm{t}\)

BAN ω is the maximum value of emf induced,

Thus writing BANω  = ∈0

∴ ∈ = ∈0 sin ωt

This equation represents the instantaneous value of emf induced at time t.

If the total resistance of the circuit along with the coil is R, then the induced current due to alternating voltage

I = \(\frac{\epsilon}{R}=\frac{\epsilon_0}{R} \sin \omega t\)

or I = \(I_0 \sin \omega t\)

where \(I_0=\frac{\epsilon_0}{R}\) is the maximum value of current.

The magnetic flux linked with the coil and the emf induced at different positions of the coil in one rotational cycle is shown in the following table:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Magnetic Flux Linked With Coil

The variations of magnetic flux linked with the coil and induced e.m.f at different times given in the above table are shown in the following figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Variation Of Magnetic Flux Linked With Coil And Induced EMF

The phase difference between the instantaneous magnetic flux and induced emf is π/2.

The ratio of \(_\max\) and \(\phi_{\max }\) is equal to the angular velocity of the coil,

Thus \(\frac{\epsilon_{\max }}{\phi_{\max }}=\frac{\mathrm{NBA} \omega}{\mathrm{NBA}}=\omega\)

If \(\theta=\frac{\pi}{4}=45^{\circ}\), then \(\quad \Rightarrow \quad \phi=\frac{\mathrm{NBA}}{\sqrt{2}}\) and \(\epsilon=\frac{\mathrm{NBA} \omega}{\sqrt{2}}\)

In this case, the ratio of the induced emf and the magnetic flux is equal to the angular velocity of the coil.

Thus \(\frac{\epsilon}{\phi}=\frac{\mathrm{NBA}}{\sqrt{2}} / \frac{\mathrm{NBA}}{\sqrt{2}}=\omega\)

The direction of induced emf in the coil changes during one cycle so it is called alternating emf and current induced due to it is called alternating current. This is the principle of AC generator.

4.4. Rotation Of A Rectangular Coil In A Uniform Magnetic Field Solved Examples

Example 1. The phase difference between the emf induced in the coil rotating in a uniform magnetic field and the magnetic flux associated with it is

  1. π
  2. π/2
  3. π/3
  4. Zero

Solution:

Φ = NAB cosωt and ∈ = NAB ω sin ωt

Hence the phase difference between Φ and ∈ will be π/2.

∴ The answer will be (2)

Example 2. A coil has 20 turns and the area of each turn is 0.2 m². If the plane of the coil makes an angle of 60º with the direction of the magnetic field of 0.1 tesla, then the magnetic flux associated with the coil will be

  1. 0.4 weber
  2. 0.346 weber
  3. 0.2 weber
  4. 0.02 weber

Solution:

Φ = n(B da cosθ)

= 20 × 0.1 × 0.2 cos (90º– 60º) = 20 × 0.1 × 0.2 × \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\) = 0.346 weber

∴ The answer will be (2)

Example 3. A ring rotates with angular velocity ω about an axis in the plane of the ring and passes through the centre of the ring. A constant magnetic field B exists perpendicular to the plane of the ring. Find the emf induced in the ring as a function of time.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Ring Rotated With Angular Velocity

Solution:

At any time t, Φ = BA cosθ = BA cosωt

Now induced emf in the loop = \(\frac{-\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{BA} \omega \sin \omega \mathrm{t}\)

If there are N turns emf = BAωN sin ωt

BA ωN is the amplitude of the emf e = em sin ωt

i = \(\frac{e}{R}=\frac{e_m}{R} \sin \omega t=i_m \sin \omega t\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction The Rotating Coil Prouduced A Sinusoidally Varying Current

∴ \(i_m=\frac{e_m}{R}\)

The rotating coil thus produces a sinusoidally varying current or alternating current. This is also the principle used in the generator.

Example 4. Showing a wire frame PQSTXYZ placed in a time-varying magnetic field given as B=βt, where β is a positive constant. Resistance per unit length of the wire is λ. Find the current induced in the wire and draw its electrical equivalent diagram.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Wire Frames Placed In A Time Varying Magnetic Field

Solution:

Induced emf in part PQST = β a² (in an anticlockwise direction, from Lenz’s Law)

Similarly Induced emf in part TXYZ = β b² (in an anticlockwise direction, from Lenz’s Law)

The total resistance of the part PQST =λ4a.

The total resistance of the part PQST = l4b.

The equivalent circuit is shown in the following diagram.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Resistance Of The Part Is Equilavlent Circuit

writing KVL along the current flow \(\beta b^2-\beta a^2-\lambda 4 a i-\lambda 4 b i=0 \quad \Rightarrow \quad i=\frac{\beta}{4 \lambda}(b-a)\)

5. Fixed Loop In A Time-Varying Magnetic Field

Now consider a circular loop, at rest in a varying magnetic field. Suppose the magnetic field is directed inside the page and it is increasing in magnitude.

The emf induced in the loop will be \(\varepsilon=-\frac{d \phi}{d t}.\)

Flux through the coil will be \(\phi=-\pi r^2 B ; \frac{d \phi}{d t}=-\pi r^2 \frac{d B}{d t} ; \varepsilon=-\frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

∴ \(\varepsilon=\pi r^2 \frac{d B}{d t} . \)

∴ \(E 2 \pi r=\pi r^2 \frac{d B}{d t} \quad \text { or } \quad E=\frac{r}{2} \frac{d B}{d t}\)

Thus changing the magnetic field produces an electric field which is non-conservative in nature. Work done in the closed path on unit +ve charge is not zero. The lines of force associated with this electric field are closed curves.

6. Self Induction

Self-induction is the induction of emf in a coil due to its own current change. Total flux NΦ passing through a coil due to its own current is proportional to the current and is given as NΦ = L i where L is called the coefficient of self-induction or inductance.

The inductance L is purely a geometrical property i.e., we can tell the inductance value even if a coil is not connected in a circuit. Inductance depends on the shape and size of the loop and the number of turns it has.

If current in the coil changes by ΔI in a time interval At, the average emf induced in the coil is given as \(\varepsilon=-\frac{\Delta(\mathrm{N} \phi)}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=-\frac{\Delta(\mathrm{LI})}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=-\frac{\mathrm{L} \Delta \mathrm{I}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}.\)

The instantaneous emf is given as \(\varepsilon=-\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{N} \phi)}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{LI})}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{LdI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

S.I Unit of inductance is wb/amp or Henry(H)

L – self-inductance is +ve quantity.

L Depends On:

  1. Geometry of loop
  2. Medium in which it is kept. L does not depend upon the current.

L is a scalar quantity.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6: Electromagnetic Induction Formulas

6.1 Self-Inductance Of Solenoid

Let the volume of the solenoid be V, and the number of turns per unit length be n.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Self Inductance Of Solenoid

Let a current I be flow in the solenoid. The magnetic field in the solenoid is given as B = \(\mu_0 n l\). The magnetic flux through one turn of solenoid \(\phi=\mu_0 n \text { I A. }\)

The total magnetic flux through the solenoid = \(N \phi=N \mu_0 n I A=\mu_0 n^2 \mid A I\)

∴ L = \(\mu_0 \mathrm{n}^2 I A=\mu_0 n^2 V\)

Φ = \(\mu_0 n i \pi r^2(n \ell)\)

L = \(\frac{\phi}{\mathrm{i}}=\mu_0 \mathrm{n}^2 \pi \mathrm{r}^2 \ell\).

Inductance per unit volume = \(\mu_0 \mathrm{n}^2\).

Self-inductance is the physical property of the loop due to which it opposes the change in current which means it tries to keep the current constant. The current can not change suddenly in the inductor.

7. Inductor

It is represented  NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Inductor  by the electrical equivalence of a loop.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Inductor Electrical Equivalence Of Loop

If current i through the inductor is increasing the induced emf will oppose the increase in current and hence will be opposite to the current.

If current i through the inductor is decreasing the induced emf will oppose the decrease in current and hence will be in the direction of the current.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Through The Inductor Is Increasing The Induced EMF Will Opposite The Increase In Current

Note: If there is a resistance in the inductor (resistance of the coil of the inductor) then:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Resistance In The Inductor

Example: A B is a part of the circuit. Find the potential difference vA – vB if

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction AB Is A Part Of Circuit

  1. current i = 2A and is constant
  2. current i = 2A and is increasing at the rate of 1 amp/sec.
  3. current i = 2A and is decreasing at the rate of 1 amp/sec

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Part Of Circuit Potential Difference

Solution:

L \(\frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}=1 \frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

writing KVL from A to B \(V_A-1 \frac{d i}{d t}-5-2 i=V_B \text {. }\)

(1)Put \(i=2, \frac{d i}{d t}=0\); \(V_A-5-4=V_B\)

∴ \(V_A-V_B=9 \text { volt }\)

(2) Put \(\mathrm{i}=2, \frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}=1 ; \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}-1-5-4=\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}\) or \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}=10\) Volt

(3) Put \(\mathrm{i}=2, \frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-1 ; \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}+1-5-2 \times 2=\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}\) or \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}=8\) volt.

7.1 Energy Stored In An Inductor

If the current in an inductor at an instant is i and is increasing at the rate di/dt, the induced emf will oppose the current. Its behaviour is shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Energy Stored In An Inductor

Power consumed by the inductor = i L \(\frac{di}{dt}\)

Energy consumed in dt time = i L \(\frac{di}{dt}\) dt

∴ total energy consumed as the current increases from 0 to I = \(\int_0^1 \mathrm{iLdi}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Li}^2 \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{U}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2\)

This energy is stored in the magnetic field with energy density \(\frac{d U}{d V}=\frac{B^2}{2 \mu}=\frac{B^2}{2 \mu_0 \mu_r} \quad \text { Total energy } U=\int \frac{B^2}{2 \mu_0 \mu_r} d V\)

Example 2. A circuit contains an ideal cell and an inductor with a switch. Initially, the switch is open. It is closed at t=0. Find the current as a function of time.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Circuit Contains An Ideal Cell And An Inductor With A Switch

Solution:

ε = \(\mathrm{L} \frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}} \quad \Rightarrow \int_0^{\mathrm{i}} \varepsilon \mathrm{dt}=\int_0^{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{Ldi} \Rightarrow \quad \varepsilon \mathrm{t}=\mathrm{Li} \Rightarrow \mathrm{i}=\frac{\varepsilon \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{L}}\)

Example 3. In the following circuit, the switch is closed at t = 0. Find the currents \(\mathrm{i}_1, \mathrm{i}_2, \mathrm{i}_3 \text { and } \frac{\mathrm{di}_3}{\mathrm{dt}} \text { at } \mathrm{t}=0\). Initially, all currents are zero.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Current Cannot Suddenly Change Due To Inductor

Solution:

At t = 0

i3 is zero since the current cannot suddenly change due to the inductor.

∴ i1 = i2(from KCL)

applyingKVL in the part ABEF we get \(i_1=\frac{\varepsilon}{2 R} i_2=, i_3=0, \frac{d i_3}{d t}=\frac{\epsilon}{2 L}\)

At t = ∞

i3 will become constant and hence potential difference across the inductor will be zero. It is just like a simple wire and the circuit can be solved assuming it to be like shown in the following diagram.NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Potential Difference Across The Inductor Will be Zero

⇒ \(\mathrm{i}_2=\mathrm{i}_3=\frac{\varepsilon}{3 \mathrm{R}}, \mathrm{i}_1=\frac{2 \varepsilon}{3 \mathrm{R}}, \frac{d \mathrm{i}_3}{\mathrm{dt}}=0\)

7.2 Growth Of Current In Series R–L Circuit

Figure shows a circuit consisting of a cell, an inductor L and a resistor R, connected in series.

Let the switch S be closed at t=0. Suppose at an instant current in the circuit is i which is increasing at the rate di/dt.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Growth Of Current In Seried RL Circuit

Writing KVL along the circuit, we have \(\varepsilon-L \frac{d i}{d t}-\mathrm{i} R=0\)

On solving we get, \(\mathrm{i}=\frac{\varepsilon}{\mathrm{R}}\left(1-\mathrm{e}^{\frac{-\mathrm{Rt}}{\mathrm{L}}}\right)\)

The quantity L/R is called the time constant of the circuit and is denoted by τ. The variation of current with time is as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Growth Of Current In Seried R-L Circuit

Note: 1. Final current in the circuit = \(\frac{\varepsilon}{\mathrm{R}}\), which is independent of L.

2. After one time constant, current in the circuit =63% of the final current (verify yourself)

3. More time constant in the circuit implies a slower rate of change of current.

4. If there is any change in the circuit containing the inductor then there is no instantaneous effect on the flux of the inductor.  L1i1 = L2i2

Example. At t = 0 switch is closed (shown in figure) after a long time suddenly the inductance of the inductor is made η times lesser \(\left(\frac{L}{\eta}\right)\) by pulling out the iron rod inserted in it then its initial value, find out instant current just after the operation.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Indtant Current just After The Operation

Solution:

Using above result \(L_1 i_1=L_2 i_2 \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{i}_2=\frac{\eta \varepsilon}{R}\)

7.3 Decay Of Current In The Circuit Containing Resistor And Inductor

Let the initial current in the circuit be I0. At any time t, let the current be i and let its rate of change at this instant be \(\frac{d i}{d t}\)

L\(\cdot \frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}+\mathrm{iR}=0\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Decay Of Current In The Circuit Containg Resistor And Inductor

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{iR}}{\mathrm{L}}\)

⇒ \(\int_{i_0}^1 \frac{d i}{i}=-\int_0^t \frac{R}{L} \cdot d t \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ln \left(\frac{i}{I_0}\right)=-\frac{R t}{L} \text { or } i=I_0 e^{\frac{-R t}{L}}\)

Current after one-time constant: i = I0e-1 = 0.37% of initial current.

Equivalent Self Inductance: \(\mathrm{L}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{di} / \mathrm{dt}}\)…..(1)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Equivalent Self Inductance

Series Combination: \(V_A-L_1 \frac{d i}{d t}-L_2 \frac{d i}{d t}=V_B\) ….(2) from (1) and (2)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Parallel Combination Of Inductance

L = \(\mathrm{L}_1+\mathrm{L}_2\) (neglecting mutual inductance)

Parallel Combination:

From figure \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}=\mathrm{L}_1 \frac{\mathrm{di}_1}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{L}_2 \frac{\mathrm{di}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) also i = \(\mathrm{i}_1+\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{z}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Parallel Combination Of Self Inductance

or, \(\frac{d i}{d t}=\frac{d i_1}{d t}+\frac{d i_2}{d t}\) or \(\frac{V_A-V_B}{L}=\frac{V_A-V_B}{L_1}+\frac{V_A-V_B}{L_2}\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{L}=\frac{1}{L_1}+\frac{1}{L_2}\) (neglecting mutual inductance)

Example: An inductor having self-inductance L with its coil resistance R is connected across a battery of emfε. When the circuit is in a steady state at t = 0 an iron rod is inserted into the inductor due to which its inductance becomes n L (n> 1).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction An Inductor Having Self Inductance

1. After insertion of the rod which of the following quantities will change with time?

  1. The potential difference across terminals A and B.
  2. Inductance.
  3. The rate of heat produced in the coil
  1. Only (1)
  2. (1) and (3)
  3. Only (3)
  4. (1), (2) and (3)

Solution:

Inductance and potential differences across terminals will not change with time.

2. After insertion of the rod, current in the circuit:

  1. Increases with time
  2. Decreases with time
  3. Remains constant with time
  4. First decreases with time then becomes constant

Solution:

Even after the insertion of the rod, the current in the circuit will increase with time till a steady state is reached.

Electromagnetic Induction Concept Notes for NEET Physics Class 12

3. When again circuit is in a steady state, the current in it is:

  1. \(K \varepsilon / R\)
  2. \(\mid>E / R\)
  3. \( I=\varepsilon / R\)
  4. None of these

Solution:

At steady state inductor will offer zero resistance and hence I = \(\varepsilon / R\).

8. Mutual Inductance

Consider two arbitrary conducting loops 1 and 2. Suppose that I1 is the instantaneous current flowing around loop 1. This current generates a magnetic field B1 which links the second circuit, giving rise to a magnetic flux Φ2 through that circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Mutual Inductance

If the current I1 doubles, then the magnetic field B1 doubles in strength at all points in space, so the magnetic flux Φ2 through the second circuit also doubles.

Furthermore, it is obvious that the flux through the second circuit is zero whenever the current flowing around the first circuit is zero. It follows that the flux Φ2 through the second circuit is directly proportional to the current I1 flowing around the first circuit.

Hence, we can write Φ2 =M21 I1 where the constant of proportionality M21 is called the mutual inductance of circuit 2 with respect to circuit 1.

Similarly, the flux Φ2 through the first circuit due to the instantaneous current I2 flowing around the second circuit is directly proportional to that current, so we can write Φ1 =M12I2 where M12 is the mutual inductance of circuit 1 with respect to circuit 2.

It can be shown that M21= M12 (Reciprocity Theorem). Note that M is a purely geometric quantity, depending only on the size, number of turns, relative position, and relative orientation of the two circuits. The S.I. unit of mutual inductance is called Henry (H).

One Henry is equivalent to a volt-second per ampere:

Suppose that the current flowing around circuit 1 changes by an amount ΔI1 in a small time interval Δt.

The flux linking circuit 2 changes by an amount ΔΦ2=MΔI1 in the same time interval.

According to Faraday’s law, an emf \(\varepsilon_2=-\frac{\Delta \phi_2}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) is generated around the second circuit due to the changing magnetic flux linking that circuit.

Since, \(\Delta \phi_2=M \Delta \mathrm{I}_1\), this emf can also be written \(\varepsilon_2=-M \frac{\Delta \mathrm{l}_1}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)

Thus, the emf generated around the second circuit due to the current flowing around the first circuit is directly proportional to the rate at which that current changes.

Likewise, if the current I2 flowing around the second circuit changes by an amount ΔI1 in a time interval Δt then the emf generated around the first circuit is \(\varepsilon_1=-M \frac{\Delta l_2}{\Delta t}\)

Note that there is no direct physical connection(coupling) between the two circuits: the coupling is due entirely to the magnetic field generated by the currents flowing around the circuits.

Note:

  1. \(M \leq \sqrt{L_1 L_2}\)
  2. For two coils in series if mutual inductance is considered then \(\mathrm{L}_{\mathrm{eq}}=\mathrm{L}_1+\mathrm{L}_2 \pm 2 \mathrm{M}\)

Unit Of \(\mathbf{M}\): In M.K.S. system unit of mutual inductance is henry

M = \(\frac{E_B}{-\left(\mathrm{dI}_{\mathrm{A}} / \mathrm{dT}\right)}=\frac{\phi_B}{I_A}\)

∴ 1 henry = \(\frac{1 \text { volt }}{1 \text { ampere } / \mathrm{s}}=\frac{1 \text { weber }}{\text { ampere }}=\frac{\text { (joule } / \text { coulomb)s }}{\text { ampere }}=\mathrm{J} / \mathrm{A}^2\)

Dimensions Of M:

M = \(\frac{J}{A^2}=\frac{\text { joule }}{\text { ampere }^2}=\frac{\text { newton } \times \text { metre }}{\text { ampere }^2}=\frac{\mathrm{kg} \times \text { metre } \times \mathrm{sec}^{-2} \times \text { metre }}{\text { ampere }^2}=\mathrm{ML}^2 \mathrm{~T}^{-2} \mathrm{~A}^{-2}\)

Mutual inductance between the coils depends upon the number of turns in the coils, the area and the permeability of the core placed inside the coils. The larger the magnitude of M, the more is the emf induced in the secondary coil.

Out of the two coils coupled magnetically one coil can be taken as primary and the other coil as secondary. Thus mutual inductance MAB = MBA = M

Mutual inductance between two coaxial solenoids of length l and cross-sectional area A is M = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{~N}_1 \mathrm{~N}_2 \mathrm{~A}}{\ell}\) = where N1 and N2 are the number of turns in the two coils respectively.

If two coils are wound one over the other, then mutual inductance will be maximum and it will be less in other arrangements.

M and L have the following relation: \(M \propto \sqrt{L_1 L_2}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction If Two Coils Are Wound One Over The Other Then Mutual Inductance

M = \(K \sqrt{L_1 L_2}\)

where K is a coupling constant of coils and its value varies from 0 to 1.

  1. If K = 0, then there will be no coupling between the coils, that is magnetic flux produced by the primary coil is not linked with the secondary coil.
  2. If K = 1, then both coils are coupled together with maximum transfer to energy, that is, the magnetic flux produced by the primary coil is totally linked with the secondary coil.

If two coils of self inductances L1 and L2 are coupled in series such that their windings are in the same sense and the mutual inductance between them is M, then the equivalent inductance will be L = L1 + L2 + 2M

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Coils Of Self Inductance Are Coupled Series

If two coils are coupled in series such that their windings are in opposite sense then equivalent inductance will be L = L1 + L2 – 2M

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction If Two Coils Are Coupled In Series

Electromagnetic Induction Concept Notes for NEET Physics Class 12

8. Mutual Inductance Solved Examples

Example 1. A coil of radius 1 cm and 100 turns is placed at the centre of a long solenoid of radius 5 cm and 8 turns/cm. The value of the coefficient of mutual induction will be

  1. 3.15 × 10-5 H
  2. 6 × 10-5 H
  3. 9 × 10-5 H
  4. Zero

Solution:

M = \(\mu_0 n_1 N_2 \pi \pi^2=4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 800 \times 100 \pi \times(0.01)^2=3.15 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{H}\)

Hence the correct answer will be (1)

Example 2. The coefficients of self induction of two coils are 0.01 H and 0.03 H respectively. If they oppose each other then the resultant self-induction will be, if M = 0.01H

  1. 2H
  2. 0.02H
  3. 0.02H
  4. Zero

Solution:

L = L1 + L2 – 2M = 0.01 + 0.03 – 2 × 0.01

Hence the correct answer will be (3)

Example 3. Two insulated wires are wound on the same hollow cylinder, so as to form two solenoids sharing a common air-filled core. Let I be the length of the core, A the cross-sectional area of the core, N1 the number of times the first wire is wound around the core, and N2 the number of turns the second wire is wound around the core. Find the mutual inductance of the two solenoids,neglecting the end effects.

Solution:

If a current I1 flows around the first wire then a uniform axial magnetic field of strength \(B_1=\frac{\mu_0 N_1 l_1}{\ell}\) is generated in the core. The magnetic field in the region outside the core is of negligible magnitude. The flux linking a single turn of the second wire is B1A.

Thus, the flux linking all N2 turns of the second wire is \(\phi_2=\mathrm{N}_2 \mathrm{~B}_1 \mathrm{~A}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{~N}_1 \mathrm{~N}_2 \mathrm{Al}_1}{\ell}=\mathrm{MI}_1\)

∴ M = \(\frac{\mu_0 N_1 N_2 \mathrm{~A}}{\ell}\)

As described previously, M is a geometric quantity depending on the dimensions of the core and the manner in which the two wires are wound around the core, but not on the actual currents flowing through the wires.

Example 4. Find the mutual inductance of two concentric coils of radii a1 and a2 (a1<< a2) if the planes of coils are the same.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Mutula Inductance Of Two Concentric Coils

Solution:

Let a current i flow in a coil of radius a2

Magnetic field at the centre of coil = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{a}_2} \pi \mathrm{a}_1^2\)

or \(M i=\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 a_2} \pi a_1{ }^2\) or \(M=\frac{\mu_0 \pi a_1^2}{2 a_2}\)

Example 5. Solve the above question, if the planes of coil are perpendicular.

Solution:

Let a current i flow in the coil of radius a1. The magnetic field at the centre of this coil will now be parallel to the plane of smaller coil and hence no flux will pass through it, M = 0.

Example 6. Solve the above problem if the planes of coils make θ angles with each other.

Solution:

If I current flows in the larger coil, magnetic field produced at the centre will be perpendicular to the plane of larger coil.

Now the area vector of smaller coil which is perpendicular to the plane of smaller coil will make an angle θ with the magnetic field.

Thus flux = \(\vec{B} \cdot \vec{A}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{a}_2} \cdot \pi \mathrm{a}_1^2 \cdot \cos \theta\) or \(\mathrm{M}=\frac{\mu_0 \pi \mathrm{a}_1^2 \cos \theta_1}{2 \mathrm{a}_2}\)

Example 7. The figure shows two concentric coplanar coils with radii a and b (a << b). A current i = 2t flows in the smaller loop. Neglecting self-inductance of the larger loop

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Concentric Coplanar Coils

  1. Find the mutual inductance of the two coils
  2. Find the emf induced in the larger coil
  3. If the resistance of the larger loop is R find the current in it as a function of time

Solution:

(1) To find mutual inductance, it does not matter in which coil we consider current and in which flux is calculated (Reciprocity theorem) Let current I be flowing in the larger coil. Magnetic field at the centre = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{~b}}\)

flux through the smaller coil = \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 b} \pi a^2\)

∴ M = \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 b} \pi a^2\)

(2) |emf induced in larger coil| = M \(\mathrm{M}\left[\left(\frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right) \text { in smaller coil }\right](2)=\frac{\mu_0 \pi \mathrm{a}^2}{\mathrm{~b}}\)

(3) current in the larger coil = \(\frac{\mu_0 \pi \mathrm{a}^2}{\mathrm{bR}}\)

9. Eddy Current

When a conductor is placed in a changing magnetic field, induced EMF is produced in it. As a result local currents are produced in the conductor. These local currents are called eddy currents.

  • If a conducting material is moved in a magnetic field, then eddy currents are also produced.
  • Eddy currents flows in closed paths.
  • There is a loss of energy due to eddy currents and it appears in the form of heat.
  • In order to minimize the energy loss in the form of heat due to eddy currents the core of dynamo, motor or transformer is not taken as a single piece of soft iron but in the form of a peck of thin sheets insulated from each other by a layer of insulating varnish, called laminated core.
  • This device increases the resistance for the eddy currents. In this way eddy currents are considerably reduced and loss of energy becomes less.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Eddy Currents

Uses Of Eddy Currents:

  1. Moving coil galvanometer
  2. Induction furnace
  3. Dead beat galvanometer
  4. Speedometer
  5. Electric brakes

10. Generator Or Dynamo

A generator or dynamo is an electrical device which converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

The working of generators is based on the principle of electromagnetic induction.

Generators Are Of Two Types:

  1. A.C. Generator: If the current produced by the generator is alternating, then the generator is called A.C. generator.
  2. D.C. Generator: If the current produced by the generator is direct current, then the generator is called a D.C. generator.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Generator Or Dynamo

Generator consists of the following parts.

  1. Armature (coil)
  2. Magnet
  3. Slip rings
  4. Brushes

In D.C. generator commutator is used in place of slip rings.

In order to produce the magnetic field in big generators several magnetic poles are used. In these generators the armature coils are kept stationary and magnetic pole pieces are made to rotate around the armature.

The frequency of alternating current produced by generator of multi poles is = \(\frac{\text { number of poles } \times \text { rotational frequency }}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{Nn}}{2}\)

Energy Loss In Generators: The loss of energy is due to the following reasons

  1. Flux leakage,
  2. Copper losses,
  3. Eddy’s current losses,
  4. Hysteresis losses,
  5. Mechanical losses

Efficiency Of Generator: Practical efficiency of a generator = \(\frac{\text { Electrical power generated by the generator }}{\text { Mechanical energy given to the generator }}\)

Practical efficiencies of big generators are about 92% to 95%.

11. Motor

It converts electrical energy into mechanical energy.

When a current carrying conductor (coil) is placed in a magnetic field, a couple acts on it which makes the coil to rotate.

Electric Motors Are Of Two Types:

  1. Alternating current motor (AC motor)
  2. Direct current motor (DC motor)

D.C. Motor Consists Of The Following Parts:

  1. Armature
  2. Magnet
  3. Commentator
  4. Brushes

Back E.M.F: When current from an external electric source is passed through the armature of the electric motor, the armature coil rotates in the magnetic field.

It cuts the magnetic lines of force as a result EMF is induced in it. According to Lenz’s law this induced emf opposes the rotation of the armature i.e., the emf induced works opposite to the emf applied by the external electric source and opposes the motion of the armature.

This induced emf is called back emf. The greater the speed of the armature coil, the greater is the back emf.

At the time of start of the motor back emf is almost zero and the current flowing in the motor is maximum. As the speed of the armature coil increases, back emf also increases.

When the coil increases, back emf also increases. When the coil attains maximum speed, the induced emf becomes constant and current reduced to minimum.

Back emf is directly proportional to the angular velocity ω of rotation of armature and the magnetic field B, i.e., for constant magnetic field back emf. e ∝ ω or e = Kω where K is a constant.

If E is applied emf, e is the back emf and R is the resistance of the coil (armature), then the current flowing through the coil will be

i = \(\frac{E-e}{R} \quad \text { or } \quad E=e+i R \quad \text { but } \quad e=K \omega\)

∴ \(i=\frac{E-K \omega}{R}\)

In the beginning, i.e. at the time of the start of the motor ω = 0

∴ i = \(\frac{E}{R}\)

In this case current will be maximum.

  • As the armature coil is made from copper wire its resistance is very small. When the motor starts running, a very heavy current passes through the armature coil in the beginning.
  • Due to which motor may get burnt.
  • To prevent the motor from burning at the time of start a special variable resistance is connected in series with the armature, which is called starter.
  • High resistance is connected in series with the armature coil with the help of starter at the time of start of the motor.
  • As the motor starts picking up speed, the resistance is gradually reduced till it becomes zero.
  • The starter is used in a high power motors but not in the low power motors because its coil starts rotating at a very high speed in a short time

Power of electric motor = ie

Efficiency of motor

η = \(\frac{\text { Work done by the motor }}{\text { Energy taken from the electric source by the motor }}=\frac{W}{P} \times 100 \%\)

or \(\eta =\frac{\text { Back emf }}{\text { Applied emf }} \times 100 \%=\frac{e}{E} \times 100 \%\)

Generally, the efficiency of the motor is from 80% to 90%.

11. Motor Solved Miscellaneous Problems

Problem 1. Find the emf across the points P and Q which are diametrically opposite points of a semicircular closed loop moving in a magnetic field as shown. Also, draw the electrical equivalent circuit of each branch.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Across The Points With Are Diametrically Opposite Points Of Semicircular Closed Loop Moving Magnetic Field

Solution:

here \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \| \vec{\ell}\)

So,emf = \(\vec{\ell} \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})=0\)

Induced emf = 0

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Electrical Equivalent Circuit Of Each Branch

Problem 2. Find the emf across the points P and Q which are diametrically opposite points of a semicircular closed loop moving in a magnetic field as shown. Also, draw the electrical equivalence of each branch.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Across The Points which Are Diametrically Opposite Points Of A Semicicular Closed loop Moving Magnetic Field

Solution:

Induced emf = 2Bav

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Across The Points which Are Diametrically Opposite Points Of A Electrical Equivalence Of Each Branch

Problem 3. Figure shows a rectangular loop moving in a uniform magnetic field. Show the electrical equivalence of each branch.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rectangular Loop Moving In A Uniform Magnetic Field

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rectangular Loop Moving Electrical Equivalence

Problem 4. The figure shows a rod of length l and resistance r moving on two rails shorted by a resistance R. A uniform magnetic field B is present normal to the plane of rod and rails. Show the electrical equivalence of each branch.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rod Of Length And Resistance Moving On Two Rails

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Fixed Conducting Thick Rails

Class 12 Physics Electromagnetic Induction Notes for NEET

Problem 5. A rod PQ of length 2l is rotating about its midpoint C, in a uniform magnetic field B which is perpendicular to the plane of rotation of the rod. Find the induced emf between PQ and PC. Draw the circuit diagram of parts PC and CQ.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Circuit Diagram

Solution:

∴ \(\mathrm{emf}_{\mathrm{PQ}}=0 ; \mathrm{emf}_{\mathrm{PC}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} \omega \ell^2}{2}\)

Problem 6. Which of the two curves shown has less time constant?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Curves Shown Has less Time Constant

Solution:

curve 1

Problem 7. Find the mutual inductance of a straight long wire and a rectangular loop, as shown in the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Mutual Inductance Of A Straight Long Wore And A Rectangular loop

Solution:

⇒ \(d \phi=\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi r} \times b d r\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Mutual Inductance Of A Straight Long Wire

⇒ \(\phi=\int_x^{x+a} \frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi r} \times b d r \quad \Rightarrow \quad M=\phi / l \quad \Rightarrow \quad M=\frac{\mu_0 b}{2 \pi} \ln \left(1+\frac{a}{x}\right)\)

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Key Concept

Magnetic flux is mathematically defined as \(\phi=\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)

Faraday’s Laws Of Electromagnetic Induction

When magnetic flux passing through a loop changes with time or magnetic lines of force are cut by a conducting wire then an emf is produced in the loop or in that wire.

The magnitude of induced emf is equal to the rate of change of flux w.r.t. time in the case of a loop. In the case of a wire, it is equal to the rate at which magnetic lines of force are cut by a wire.

∴ \(\epsilon=-\frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

A negative sign implies that emf induces in such a way opposition to change in flux.

Lenz’s Law(based on the conservation of energy principle)

According to this law, emf will be induced in such a way that it will oppose the cause which has produced it.

If a wire AB is moving with constant velocity \(\vec{v}\) in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) then emf induced in any path joining A and B is same which is equal to \((\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}) \cdot(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})\) where L is the distance between A and B.

Induced Emf Due To Rotation Of Ring: Emf induced in a conducting rod of length l rotating with angular speed ra about its one end, in a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of rotation is 1/2 B ωl².

EMF Induced In A Rotating Disc: Emf between the centre and the edge of the disc of radius r rotating in a magnetic field \(\mathrm{B}=\frac{\mathrm{B} \omega \mathrm{r}^2}{2}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction EMF Induced In Rotating Disc

Self-Induction: Self-induction is the induction of emf in a coil due to its own current change. Total flux NΦ passing through a coil due to its own current is proportional to the current and is given as NΦ= L i where L is called the coefficient of self-induction or inductance.

The inductance L is purely a geometrical property.

If the current in the coil changes by ΔI in a time interval Δt, the average emf induced in the coil is given as \(\varepsilon=-\frac{\Delta(\mathrm{N} \phi)}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=-\frac{\Delta(\mathrm{LI})}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=-\frac{\mathrm{L} \Delta \mathrm{I}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)

The instantaneous emf is gien as \(\varepsilon=-\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{N} \phi)}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{LI})}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{Ldl}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Self inductance of solenoid = \(\mu_0 \mathrm{n}^2 \pi \mathrm{r}^2 \ell\)

Inductor: It is represented  NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Inductor by the electrical equivalence of the loop

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Energy Stored In Inductor

Energy stored in an inductor = \(\frac{1}{2}\) LI²

Growth Of Current in Series R-L Circuit:

If a circuit consists of a cell, an inductor L a resistor R and a switch S, connected in series and the switch is closed at t = 0, the current in the circuit I will increase as i = \(\frac{\varepsilon}{R}\left(1-e^{\frac{-R t}{L}}\right)\)

1. Final current in the circuit = \(\frac{\varepsilon}{\mathrm{R}}\), which is independent of L.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Growth Of Current In Seried R-L Circuit

2. After one time constant, the current in the circuit =63% of the final current.

Properties Of R-L Circuit

  1. At t = 0, the inductor behaves like an open circuit.
  2. At t = ∞ (after a very long time), the inductor behaves like a short-circuited wire.
  3. Currently in inductor has not abruptly changed.

Decay Of Current In The Circuit Containing Resistor And Inductor:

Let the initial current in a circuit containing an inductor and resistor be I0. Current at a time t is given as i = \(\mathrm{I}_0 e^{\frac{-\mathrm{Rt}}{\mathrm{L}}}\)

Mutual Inductance: This is the induction of EMF in a coil (secondary) due to a change in current in another coil (primary). If the current in the primary coil is i, the total flux in the secondary is proportional to i, i.e. N Φ (in secondary) ∝i.

or N Φ (in secondary) = M i.

Equivalent Self Inductance: L = \(\frac{V_A-V_B}{d i / d t}\)…..(1)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Equivalent Self Inductance

Series Combination:

L = L1 + L2 (neglecting mutual inductance)

L = L1 + L2 + 2M (if coils are mutually coupled and they have winding in the same direction)

L = L1 + L2 – 2M (if coils are mutually coupled and they have to wind in opposite directions)

Parallel Combination: \(\frac{1}{L}=\frac{1}{L_1}+\frac{1}{L_2}\) (neglecting mutual inductance)

For two coils which are mutually coupled, it has been found that \(M \sqrt{L_1 L_2} \text { or } M=k \sqrt{L_1 L_2}\) where k is called coupling constant and its value is less than or equal to 1.

L.C. Oscillations: Let a capacitor be charged to Q and then connected in series with an inductor with the help of a switch as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction L C Oscillator

Let the switch be closed at t=0. Let at a time t=t, the charge on the capacitor be q and the current in the circuit be i where i = – \(\frac{dq}{dt}\).

Writing Kirchoff’s equation,we get \(\frac{q}{C}=L \frac{d i}{d t}=-L \frac{d^2 q}{d t^2} \text { or } \frac{d^2 q}{d t^2}+\frac{q}{L C}=0 \text {. }\)

Compared with the standard differential equation it can be easily seen that therefore time period T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{L C}\).

Example: Figure shows a conducting rod of negligible resistance that can slide on a smooth U-shaped rail made of wire of resistance 1 Ω/m. The position of the conducting rod at t = 0 is shown. A time t-dependent magnetic field B = 2t Tesla is switched on at t = 0.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Conducting Rod Of negligible Resistance That Can Slide On Smooth U Shaped

1. The current in the loop at t = 0 due to induced emf is

  1. 0.16 A, clockwise
  2. 0.08 A, clockwise
  3. 0.08 A, anticlockwise
  4. zero

Solution:

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}=2 \mathrm{~T} / \mathrm{s} \quad \mathrm{E}=-\frac{\mathrm{AdB}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-800 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~m}^2 \times 2=-0.16 \mathrm{~V}, \quad \mathrm{i}=\frac{0.16}{1 \Omega}\)

= \(0.16 \mathrm{~A}, \text { clockwise }\).

2. At t = 0, when the magnetic field is switched on, the conducting rod is moved to the left at a constant speed of 5 cm/s by some external means. The rod moves remaining perpendicular to the rails. At t = 2s, induced emf has magnitude.

  1. 0.12 V
  2. 0.08 V
  3. 0.04 V
  4. 0.02 V

Solution:

At t = 2 \(\mathrm{~s} \quad \mathrm{~B}=4 \mathrm{~T} ; \frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}=2 \mathrm{~T} / \mathrm{s}\)

A = \(20 \times 30 \mathrm{~cm}^2\)

= \(600 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~m}^2 ; \frac{d A}{d t}=-(5 \times 20) \mathrm{cm}^2 / \mathrm{s} \quad=-100 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~m}^2 / \mathrm{s}\)

E = \(-\frac{d \varphi}{d t}=-\left[\frac{d(B A)}{d t}\right]=-\left[\frac{B d A}{d t}+\frac{A d B}{d t}\right]\)

= \(-\left[4 \times\left(-100 \times 10^{-4}\right)+600 \times 10^{-4} \times 2\right]=-[-0.04+0.120]=-0.08 \mathrm{~V}\)

Alternative: \(\phi=B A=2 t \times 0.2(0.4-v t)\)

= \(0.16 \mathrm{t}-0.4 \mathrm{vt}^2\)

E = \(-\frac{d \phi}{d t}=0.8 \mathrm{vt}-0.16\) at \(\mathrm{t}=2 \mathrm{~s}\)

E = -0.08 V

3. Following the situation of the previous question, the magnitude of the force required to move the conducting rod at a constant speed of 5 cm/s at the same instant t = 2s, is equal to

  1. 0.16 N
  2. 0.12 N
  3. 0.08 N
  4. 0.06 N

Solution: At t = 2s, length of the wire= (2 × 30 cm) + 20 cm = 0.8 m

Resistance of the wire = 0.8

Current through the rod = \(\frac{0.08}{0.8}=\frac{1}{10} \mathrm{~A}\)

Force on the wire = I l B = \(\frac{1}{10}\) × (0.2) × 4 = 0.08 N

The same force is applied on the rod in the opposite direction to make net force zero.

Electromagnetic Induction NEET Physics Chapter 6 Summary

Problem: A rod PQ of length l is rotating about end P, with an angular velocity ω. Due to centrifugal forces, the free electrons in the rod move towards the end Q and an emf is created. Find the induced emf.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Rod PQ Of Length Is Rotating About End P With Angular Velocity

Solution:

The accumulation of free electrons will create an electric field which will finally balance the centrifugal forces and a steady state will be reached.

In the steady state meω²x = e E

∴ \(\left.V_p-V_Q=\int_{x=0}^{x=\ell} \bar{E} \cdot d \bar{x}=\int_0^{\ell} \frac{m_e \omega^2 x}{e} d x=\frac{m_e \omega^2 \ell^2}{2 e} \approx 10^{-12} V \quad \text { (If } \omega=1, \ell=1\right)\)

This value is very small.

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Questions And Answers

Question 1. A thin semicircular conducting ring of radius R is falling with its plane vertically in a horizontal magnetic induction B. At the position MNQ the speed of the ring is v then the potential difference developed across the ring is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Thin Se,icircular Conducting Ring Of Radius

  1. Zero
  2. \(\frac{B v \pi R^2}{2}\)
  3. π RBV and Q have a higher potential
  4. 2 RBV and Q are at higher potential.

Answer: 4. 2 RBV and Q are at higher potential.

Induced motional emf in MNQ is equivalent to the motional emf in an imaginary wire MQ i.e., eMNQ = eMQ = Bvl = Bv (2R)

[l = MQ = 2R]

Therefore, the potential difference developed across the ring is 2RBv with Q at a higher potential.

Question 2. A cylindrical space of radius R is filled with a uniform magnetic induction B parallel to the axis of the cylinder. If B changes at a constant rate, the graph showing the variation of the induced electric field with distance r from the axis of the cylinder is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Cylindral Space Of Radius

Answer: 1

EMF = \(-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{dB} \pi \mathrm{r}^2}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\pi \mathrm{r}^2 \frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}} \text { or } \mathrm{E}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{EMF}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\right)=\left(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right) \frac{\mathrm{r}}{2}
\)

or \(E \propto r\) for \(r \leq R\).

E \(\propto \frac{1}{r}\) for r>R.

Question 3. In a cylindrical region uniform magnetic field which is perpendicular to the plane of the figure is increasing with time and a conducting rod PQ is placed in the region. If C is the centre of the circle then

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction In A Cylindrical Region Uniform Magnetic Field

  1. P will be at a higher potential than Q.
  2. Q will be at a higher potential than P.
  3. Both P and Q will be equipotential.
  4. No EMF will be developed across the rod as it is not crossing/cutting any line of force.

Answer: 2. Q will be at a higher potential than P.

If the circuit Q C P containing rod PQ is completed then the direction of induced current will be from Q to C to P hence Q will be at a higher potential than P.

Question 4. In a series L-R growth circuit, if the maximum current and maximum induced emf in an inductor of inductance 3mH are 2A and 6V respectively, then the time constant of the circuit is:

  1. 1 ms.
  2. 1/3 ms.
  3. 1/6 ms
  4. 1/2 ms

Answer: 1. 1 ms.

R = \(\frac{V}{I}\)

∴ \(\tau=\frac{L}{R}=1 \mathrm{~ms}\)

Question 5. Two coils of self-inductance 100 mH and 400 mH are placed very close to each other. Find the maximum mutual inductance between the two when 4 A current passes through them

  1. 200 mH
  2. 300 mH
  3. 100√2 mH
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 200 mH

∴ \(M_{\max }=\sqrt{L_1 L_2}=\sqrt{100 \times 400} \mathrm{mH}=200 \mathrm{mH} \text {. }\)

Question 6. A nonconducting ring of radius R and mass m having charge q uniformly distributed over its circumference is placed on a rough horizontal surface. A vertical time-varying uniform magnetic field B = 4t² is switched on at time t=0. The coefficient of friction between the ring and the table, if the ring starts rotating at t =2 sec, is :

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Non Conducting Ring Of Radius And Mass

  1. \(\frac{4 q m R}{g}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 q m R}{g}\)
  3. \(\frac{8 q R}{m g}\)
  4. \(\frac{q R}{2 m g}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{8 q R}{m g}\)

\(\int E d \ell=-\frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

E \(\times 2 \pi R=\pi R^2 \frac{d B}{d t}\)

E = \(\frac{R}{2} \times 8 t=R 8\)

(qE)R  = \((\mu \mathrm{mg}) R\)

μ \(=\frac{8 q R}{m g}\)

Question 7. In the figure shown a square loop PQRS of side ‘a’ and resistance ‘r’ is placed near an infinitely long wire carrying a constant current I. The sides PQ and RS are parallel to the wire. The wire and the loop are in the same plane. The loop is rotated by 180° about an axis parallel to the long wire and passes through the midpoints of the side QR and PS. The total amount of charge which passes through any point of the loop during rotation is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Total amount Of Carge Which Passes Through Any Poit Of The loop

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ia}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}} \ell \mathrm{n} 2\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \text { Ia }}{\pi}\) en2
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 I a^2}{2 \pi r}\)
  4. Cannot be found because the time of rotation is not given.

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \text { Ia }}{\pi}\) en2

q = \(\int \mathrm{Idt}=\int-\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}} \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}} \mathrm{dt}=-\frac{\Delta \phi}{\mathrm{r}}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ia}}{\pi \mathrm{r}} \ell \mathrm{n} 2\).

Question 8. Shows a conducting loop being pulled out of a magnetic field with a constant speed v. Which of the four plots shown in fig. may represent the power delivered by the pulling agent as a function of the constant speed v?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Conducting Loop Being Pulled Out Of A Magnetic Field

  1. A
  2. B
  3. C
  4. D

Answer: 2. B

P = \(\mathrm{F} . \mathrm{V}=\mathrm{Bi} \ell \mathrm{V}=\mathrm{B}\left(\frac{\mathrm{Bv} \ell}{\mathrm{R}}\right) \ell \mathrm{V}, \mathrm{P} \propto \mathrm{V}^2\)

Question 9. A uniform magnetic field, B = B0 t (where B0 is a positive constant), fills a cylindrical volume of radius R, then the potential difference in the conducting rod PQ due to the electrostatic field is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction A Uniform Magnetic Field

  1. \(\mathrm{B}_0 \ell \sqrt{\mathrm{R}^2+\ell^2}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{B}_0 \ell \sqrt{\mathrm{R}^2-\frac{\ell^2}{4}}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{B}_0 \ell \sqrt{\mathrm{R}^2-\ell^2}\)
  4. \(B_0 R \sqrt{R^2-\ell^2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\mathrm{B}_0 \ell \sqrt{\mathrm{R}^2-\ell^2}\)

∫\(\mathrm{Ed} \ell=\varepsilon, \mathrm{E}=\frac{\mathrm{r}}{2} \frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}, \quad \mathrm{E} \cos \theta=\frac{\mathrm{r} \cos \theta}{2} \quad \mathrm{~B}_0=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2} \quad \mathrm{~B}_0\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Potential Difference In The Conducting

∴ \(V_Q-V_P=\left(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2} \mathrm{~B}_0\right) 2 \ell=\mathrm{B}_0 \ell \sqrt{\mathrm{R}^2-\ell^2}\)

Question 10. An LR circuit has L = 1 H and R = 1 Ω. It is connected across an emf of 2 V. The maximum rate at which energy is stored in the magnetic field is:

  1. 1 W
  2. 2 W
  3. 1/4 W
  4. 4 W

Answer: 1. 1 W

U = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{dU}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{LI} \frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{RI}_0^2\left(1-\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{V}^2}\right) \mathrm{e}^{-\nu / t}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d U}{d t}\) is maximum when \(e^{-s t}=\frac{1}{2} \text { or }\left(\frac{d U}{d t}\right)_{\max }=\frac{E^2}{4 \mathrm{R}}=1 \mathrm{~W} \text {. }\)

Question 11. When induced emf in the inductor coil is 50% of its maximum value then stored energy in the inductor coil in the given circuit will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Induced EMF In A Inductor Coil

  1. 2.5 mJ
  2. 5mJ
  3. 15 mJ
  4. 20 mJ

Answer: 1. 2.5 mJ

E = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2 \quad E=\frac{1}{2} L \frac{\mathrm{V}^2}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} \times 5 \times 10^{-3} \times(1)^2\)

= 2.5 mJ.

Question 12. A bar magnet is released from rest coaxially along the axis of a very long, vertical copper tube. After some time the magnet

  1. Will move with an acceleration g
  2. Will move with almost constant speed
  3. Will stop in the tube
  4. Will oscillate

Answer: 2. Will move with almost constant speed

Since the tube is very long the force on the magnet due to the induced current will continue to oppose its motion till it acquires a constant speed.

Question 13. As shown in the figure P and Q are two coaxial conducting loops separated by some distance. When the switch S is closed a clockwise current lP flows in P (as seen by E) and an induced current IQ1 flows in Q. The switch remains closed for a long time. When S is opened, a current IQ2 flows in Q. Then the directions of IQ1 and IQ2 (as seen by E) are

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Two Coaxial Conducting Loop

  1. Respectively clockwise and anti-clockwise
  2. Both clockwise
  3. Both anti-clockwise
  4. Respectively anti-clockwise and clockwise.

Answer: 4. Respectively anti-clockwise and clockwise.

When switch S is closed magnetic field lines passing through Q increases in the direction from right to left. So, according to Lenz’s law induced current in Q i.e. IQ1 will flow in such a direction that the magnetic field lines due to IQ1 pass from left to right through Q.

This is possible when IQ1 flows in an anticlockwise direction as seen by E. The Opposite is the case when switch S is opened i.e. IQ2 will be clockwise as seen by E.

NEET Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Key Concepts

Question 14. An infinitely long cylindrical conducting rod is kept along the +Z direction. A constant magnetic field is also present in the +Z direction. The current induced will be

  1. 0
  2. Along +z direction
  3. Along clockwise as seen from +Z
  4. Along anticlockwise as seen from +Z

Answer: 1. 0

Zero, as there is no flux change.

Question 15. Which of the field patterns given below is valid for electric fields as well as for magnetic fields?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Field Patterns Given Below Is Valid For Electric Field

Answer: 3

True for induced electric field and magnetic field.

 

 

 

 

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths  Chapter 9 Data Handling Introduction

You must have observed your teacher recording the attendance of students in your class every, or recording marks obtained by you after every test or examination. Similarly, you must have also seen a cricket scoreboard. Two score boars have been illustrated here.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Name Of The Bowlers

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Name Of The Batsmen

You know that in a game of cricket, the information recorded is not simply about who won and who lost. In the scoreboard, you will also find some equally important information about the game. For instance, you may find out the time taken and some balls faced by the highest run-scorer.

Read and Learn More NCERT Notes for Class 6 Maths

Similarly, in your day-to-day life, you must have seen several kinds of tables consisting of numbers, figures, names, etc.

These tables provide ‘Data’. Data is a collection of numbers gathered to give some information.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling

Recording Data

Let us take an example of a class which is preparing to go for a picnic. The teacher asked the students to give their choice of fruits out of banana, apple, orange, or guava. Uma is asked to prepare the list.

She prepared a list of all the children and wrote the choice of fruit against each name. This list would help the teacher to distribute fruits according to the choice.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Recording Data

If the teacher wants to know the number of bananas required for the class, she has to read the names in the list one by one and count the total number of bananas required.

To know the number of apples, guavas, and oranges separately she has to repeat the same process for each of these fruits. How tedious and time-consuming it is! It might become more tedious if the list has, say, 50 students.

So, Uma writes only the names of these fruits one by one like banana, apple, guava, orange, apple, banana, orange, guava, banana, banana, apple, banana, apple, banana, orange, guava, apple, banana, guava, banana.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Number Fruits Required For Class

Do you think this makes the teacher’s work easier? She still has to count the fruits in the list one by one as she did earlier.

Salma has another idea. She makes four squares on the floor. Every square is kept for fruit of one kind only. She asks the students to put one pebble in the square that matches their choices, i.e. a student opting for banana will put a square marked for banana and so on.

By counting the pebbles in each square, Salma can quickly tell the number of each kind of fruit required. She can get the required information quickly by systematically placing the pieces in different squares.

Try to perform this activity for 40 students with the names of any four fruits. Instead of pebbles, you can also use bottle caps or some other tokens.

Organisation Of Data

To get the same information that Salma got, Ronald needs only a pen and a piece of paper. He does not need pebbles. He also does not ask to come and place the pebbles. He prepares the following table.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Organisation Of Data

Do you understand Ronald’s table?

What does one (✓) mark indicate?

Four students preferred guava. How many (✓) marks are there against guava? How many students were there in the class? Find all this information. Discuss these methods. Which is the best? Why? Which method is more useful when information from much larger data is required?

Example 1. A teacher wants to know the choice of food of each student as part of the mid-day meal program. The teacher assigns the task of collecting this information to Maria. Maria does so using paper and a pencil. After arranging the choices in a column, she puts against a choice of food one (I) mark for every student making that choice.

Solution: Umesh, after seeing the table suggested a better method to count the students. He asked Maria to organize the marks (l) in a group of ten as shown below:

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Organise The Marks In A Group Of Ten

Rajan made it simpler by asking her to make groups of five instead of ten, as shown below:

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Five Instead Of Ten Students

The teacher suggested that the fifth mark in a group of five marks should be used as a cross, as shown by NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Tally Marks

These are tally marks. Thus, NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Tally Marks II shows the count to be five plus two (i.e. seven) and  NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Tally Marks NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Tally Marks  shows five plus five (i.e. ten).

With this, the table looks like:

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Fifthe Mark In Group Of Five Marks

Example 2. Ekta is asked to collect data for the size of the shoes of students in her Class 6. Her findings are recorded in the manner shown below:

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Collect Data For Size Of Shoes Of Students

Solution:

Javed wanted to know

  1. The size of shoes worn by the maximum number of students,
  2. The size of shoes worn by the minimum number of students. Can you find this information?

Ekta prepared a table using tally marks.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Students Shoe Size Using Tally Marks

Now the questions asked earlier could be answered easily.

You may also do some such activity in your class using tally marks.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths  Pictograph

A cupboard has five compartments. In each compartment, a row of books is arranged.

The details are indicated in the adjoining table

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Number Of Books

Which row has the greatest number of books? Which row has the least number of books? Is there any row that does not have books?

You can answer these questions by just studying the diagram. The picture visually helps you to understand the data. It is a pictograph.

A pictograph represents data through pictures of objects. It helps answer the questions on the data at a glance.

Pictographs are often used by dailies and magazines to attract readers’ attention.

Interpretation Of A Pictograph

Example 1. The following pictograph shows the number of absentees in a class of 30 students during the previous week:

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Number Of Students Absentee In A Class

  1. On which day was the maximum number of students absent?
  2. Which day had full attendance?
  3. What was the total number of absentees in that week?

Solution:

  1. Maximum absentees were on Saturday. (There are 8 pictures in the row for Saturday; on all other days, the number of pictures is less).
  2. Against Thursday, there is no picture, i.e. no one is absent. Thus, on that day the class had full attendance.
  3. There are 20 pictures in all. So, the total number of absentees in that week was 20.

Example 2. The colors of fridges preferred by people living in a locality are shown by the following pictograph.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Colours Of Fridges Preffered By People

  1. Find the number of people preferring the blue color.
  2. How many people liked the red color?

Solution:

(1) Blue color is preferred by 50 people.

[NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Tally Person = 10, so 5 pictures indicate 5 x 10 people].

(2) Deciding the number of people like red color needs more care.

For 5 complete pictures, we get 5 x 10 = 50 people.

For the last incomplete picture, we may roughly take it as 5.

So, number of people preferring red color is nearly 55.

In the above example, the number of people who like the red color was taken as 50 + 5. If your friend wishes to take it as 50 + 8, is it acceptable?

Example 3. A survey was carried out on 30 students of class 6 in a school. Data about the different modes of transport used by them to travel to school was displayed as pictographs. What can you conclude from the pictograph?

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 9 Data Handling Mode Of Traveling The Students

Solution: From the pictograph, we find that:

  1. The number of students coming by private car is 4.
  2. Maximum number of students use the school bus. This is the most popular way.
  3. The cycle is used by only three students.
  4. The number of students using the other modes can be similarly found.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Introduction

Our study so far has been with numbers and shapes. We have learned numbers, operations on numbers, and properties of numbers. We applied our knowledge of numbers to various problems in our life.

The branch of mathematics in which we studied numbers is arithmetic. We have also learned about figures in two and three dimensions and their properties.

The branch of mathematics in which we studied shapes is geometry. Now we begin the study of another branch of mathematics. It is called algebra.

The main feature of the new branch which we are going to study is the use of letters. The use of letters will allow us to write rules and formulas in a general way. By using letters, we can talk about any number and not just a particular number.

Secondly, letters may stand for unknown quantities. By learning methods of determining unknowns, we develop powerful tools for solving puzzles and many problems from daily life.

Thirdly, since letters stand for numbers, operations can be performed on them as on numbers. This leads to the study of algebraic expressions and their properties.

You will find algebra interesting and useful. It is very useful in solving problems. Let us begin our study with simple examples.

Matchstick Patterns

Ameena and Sarita are making patterns with matchsticks. They decide to make simple patterns of the letters of the English alphabet. Ameena takes two matchsticks and forms the letter L as shown.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Matchstick Patterns

Then Sarita also picks two sticks, forms another letter L, and puts it next to the one made by Ameena.

Then Ameena adds one more L and this goes on as shown by the dots.

Their friend Appu comes in. He looks at the pattern. Appu always asks questions. He asks the girls, “How many matchsticks will be required to make seven Ls”?

Ameena and Sarita are systematic. They go on forming the patterns with 1L, 2Ls, 3Ls, and so on, and prepare a table.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Number Of Ls Formed

Appu gets the answer to his question from the Table, 7Ls require 14 matchsticks.

While writing the table, Ameena realizes that the number of matchsticks required is twice the number of Ls formed.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra

Number of matchsticks required = 2 x number of Ls.

For convenience, let us write the letter n for the number of Ls.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Ameena And His Friend Playing With Matchsticks

If one L is made, n = 1; if two Ls are made, n = 2, and so on; thus, n can be any natural number 1,2,3,4,5,….

We then write, Number of matchsticks required = 2 x n.

Instead of writing 2 x n, we write 2n.

Note that 2 n is the same as 2 x n.

Ameena tells her friends that her rule gives the number of matchsticks required for forming any number of Ls.

Thus, For n = 1, the number of matchsticks required = 2×1=2

For n = 2, the number of matchsticks required = 2×2 = 4

For = 3, the number of matchsticks required = 2×3 = 6, etc.

These numbers agree with those from Table.

Santa says, “Tito rule is very powerful! Using the rule, I can say how litany matchsticks are required to form even 100 Ls. I do not need to draw the pattern or make a table, once the rule is known”.

The Idea Of A Variable

In the above example, we found a rule to give the number of matchsticks required to make a pattern of Ls. The rule was:

Number of matchsticks required = 2n

Here, n is the number of Ls in the pattern, and n takes values 1, 2,3,4,…

Let us look at Table once again.

In the table, the value of n goes on changing (increasing). As a result, the number of matchsticks required also changed (increasing).

n is an example of a variable. Its value is not fixed; it can take any value 1, 2,3,4,… We wrote the rule for the number of matchsticks required using the variable n.

The word ‘variable’ means something that can vary, i.e. change. The value of a variable is not fixed. It can take different values.

We shall look at another example of matchstick patterns to learn more about variables.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths More Matchstick Patterns

Ameena and Sarita have become quite interested in matchstick patterns. They now want to try a pattern of the letter C. To make one C, they use three matchsticks as shown.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra More Matchstick Patterns

The table gives the number of matchsticks required to make a pattern of Cs.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Number Of Matchsticks Required For Students

Santa conies up with the rule:

Number of matchsticks required = 3n

She has used the letter n for the number of Cs; is a variable taking on values 1, 2, 3,4,…

Do you agree with Sarita?

Remember 3n is the same as 3 x n.

Next, Ameena and Sarita wish to make a pattern of Fs.

They make one F using 4 matchsticks as shown.

Can you now write the rule for making patterns of F?

Think of other letters of the alphabet and other shapes that can be made from matchsticks. For example, U (U), V (V), triangle (A), square (□), etc.

More Examples Of Variables

We have used the letter n to show a variable. Raju asks, “Why not m”?

There is nothing special about n, any letter can be used.

One may use any letter, such as m, l, p, x, y, z, etc. to show a variable. Remember, a variable is a number which does not have a fixed value.

For example, the number 5 the number 100, or any other given number is not a variable.

They have fixed values. Similarly, the number of angles of a triangle has a fixed value i.e. 3. It is not a variable. The number of corners of a quadrilateral (4) is fixed; it is also not a variable.

But n in the examples we have looked at is a variable. It takes on various values 1,2,3,4,…

Let us now consider variables in a more familiar situation.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Students Went To Buy A Note Books

Students went to buy notebooks from the school bookstore. The price of one notebook is ₹5. Munnu wants to buy 5 notebooks, Appu wants to buy 7 notebooks, Sara wants to buy 4 notebooks, and so on.

How much money should a student carry when she or he goes to the bookstore to buy notebooks?

This will depend on how many notebooks the student wants to buy. The students work together to prepare a table.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Number Of Note Books Required For Students

The letter m stands for the number of notebooks a student wants to buy; m is a variable, which can take any value 1, 2, 3, 4, …..

The total cost of m notebooks is given by the rule:

The total cost in rupees = 5 x number of notebooks required = 5m

If Munnu wants to buy 5 notebooks, then taking m = 5, we say that Munnu should carry ₹5 x 5 or ₹ 25 with him to the school bookstore.

Let us take one more example. For the Republic Day celebration in the school, children are going to perform mass drills in the presence of the chief guest. They stand 10 in a row. How many children can there be in the drill?

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Republic Day Celebration In School Children Are Going To Perform Guest

The number of children will depend on the number of rows. If there is 1 row, there will be 10 children. If there are 2 rows, there will be 2 x 10 or 20 children, and so on.

If there are r rows, there will be 1 Or children in the drill; here, r is a variable that stands for the number of rows and so takes on values 1,2,3,4…..

In all the examples seen so far, the variable was multiplied by a number. There can be different situations as well in which numbers are added to or subtracted from the variable as seen below.

Sarita says that she has 10 more marbles in her collection than Ameena. If Ameena has 20 marbles, then Sarita has 30. If Ameena has 30 marbles, then Sarita has 40, and so on.

We do not know exactly how many marbles Ameena has. She may have any number of marbles.

But we know that, Sarita’s marbles = Ameena’s marbles + 10.

We shall denote Ameena’s marbles by the letter x. Here, x is a variable, which can take any value 1, 2, 3, 4,…,10,…,20,…,30,…….

Using x, we write Sarita’s marbles = x + 10. The expression (x + 10) is read as ‘x plus ten’.

It means 10 added to x. If x is 20, (x + 10) is 30. If x is 30, (x + 10) is 40 and so on.

The expression (x + 10) cannot be simplified further.

Do not confuse x + 10 with 10x, they are different.

In 10x, x is multiplied by 10. In (x + 10), 10 is added to x. We may check this for some values of x.

For example,

If x = 2, 10x = 10 x 2 = 20 and x + 10 = 2 + 10 = 12.

If x= 10, 10x= 10 x 10= 100 and x + 10= 10+ 10 = 20.

Raju and Balu are brothers. Balu is younger than Raju by 3 years. When Raju is 12 years old, Balu is 9 years old. When Raju is 15 years old, Balu is 12 years old.

NCERT Notes For Class 6 Maths Chapter 11 Algebra Raju And Balu Are Brothers

We do not know Raju’s age exactly. It may have any value. Let x denote Raju’s age in years, x is a variable.

If Raju’s age in years is x, then Balu’s age in years is (x – 3). The expression (x – 3) is read as x minus three. As you would expect, when x is 12, (x – 3) is 9, and when x is 15, (x – 3) is 12.